Post-op reviews shared by patients themselves


After going back and forth for ages, I finally got arm + accessory breast liposuction! Arms are the one area that never slims down even when I lose weight, so short sleeves were always stressful. I looked around at several clinics and ended up consulting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. He explained in detail which areas would be worth improving for my body type, which really built my trust, and I decided on surgery after a thorough consultation. I was pretty nervous on the day of surgery, but the clinic staff and Dr. Chung kept putting me at ease and took such careful care of me that it went far more comfortably than I expected. I'm still early in recovery so there's a bit of swelling and bruising, but my arm line already looks much more defined, and I'm even more excited to see it once the swelling goes down. I'm wearing my compression garment diligently too! If you're worried about your upper arms or accessory breast tissue, I'd recommend at least getting a consultation with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. I'll keep posting updates as I see how things progress!


Now that six months have passed, the line has definitely settled in more naturally! I was already happy at the 3-month mark, but now that almost all the swelling is gone my arm line looks much cleaner The biggest difference I notice is how clothes fit! I'm really satisfied when I wear short sleeves or fitted clothes People around me even ask if I've lost weight, that's how noticeable it is The scars have faded a lot over time and now you can barely see them unless you look closely Recovery was faster than I expected, and I could feel the scars steadily improving Bruising only showed up early on and faded faster than I thought, so it was never much of a worry The swelling also went down gradually and is almost completely gone now The period where daily life felt uncomfortable wasn't long, and recovery was smooth overall The results feel better and better as time goes by, so I'm glad I did it Right now my overall arm line looks natural and clothes definitely sit differently, so I'm living happily with it


I had abdominal liposuction and an abdominoplasty with Dr. Jaeho Cho Comparing before and after, the difference in my line is overwhelming, and after the lift things improved to the point where I can wear clothes comfortably The scars are still a little visible, but they're in a spot that clothes cover, so it's fine! Almost no swelling or bruising! Recovery felt like it picked up around the 2-month mark and things got back to normal quickly! If you're in a similar situation to me, I really recommend the lift.


# Arms that feel completely my own again Three months have flown by already! They're fully my arms now~ just as comfortable as they were before surgery. I can barely remember how cautious I felt at the one-month mark, that's how completely it's blended into daily life. To the past me who put up with the stuffiness every night, wore the compression garment faithfully and rubbed on bruise cream - well done, seriously,, # A dramatic improvement in the line Now that even the residual swelling is gone, my upper arm line is much firmer and better defined than it was at 1-2 months! The faint tenderness when I pressed on it has completely disappeared too. The really amazing part is how differently clothes sit on me now. All those boxy T-shirts I used to wear to hide my arms have been shoved to the back of the closet. These days I can wear a fitted slim T-shirt or a tank top and my arms don't stand out at all, the line just falls straight down, so I'm happy every time I look in the mirror. Everyone around me keeps asking how I lost so much weight! # Scars and overall thoughts I applied scar ointment every day and kept up with care, so the scars have faded to the point where they're hardly noticeable and I don't think about them! Part of it is that I heal well, but I think it's mostly thanks to how precisely the doctor did the work. It really feels like the best decision I made this year. If you're worried about your upper arms, do it as soon as you can while you're young and your skin is still firm! You won't regret it,,


I can definitely feel the line coming together. People around me say my upper arms have slimmed down a lot. The scars and bruises started to fade right around the 2-week mark. I don't think my scarring is the severe type. Overall I think things are gradually going down, and when I went in for a radiofrequency massage recently they told me there's still swelling, so I'm looking forward to seeing an even more defined line!


Even I think they look so pretty lol and every time someone says I look fuller I feel so proud lolol At first I almost regretted not going bigger since I was doing it anyway, but not at all.. going with what they recommend really is the right call. Now that the swelling is down and everything has settled, the size and shape are just perfect. Completely satisfied!!


It's already been 3 months, and the more time passes the more the remaining swelling keeps going down, so the line looks even prettier!! I'm doing separate body care but there's still some left around my waistline so I'm going to keep working on it!! And honestly I have really bad visceral fat so my stomach stuck out a lot and it stressed me out. I'm managing it in my own way, and if I don't manage it my belly sticks out again, which I guess is just visceral fat.....nothing I can do about it..... Still, the lipo gave me great results and I'm very satisfied ^^ I'll work harder on the visceral fat and post a 6-month review with even more gone!


I had my arms and upper arm roots done, and I'm so satisfied that I regret not doing it sooner. Skip the fat-dissolving injections and the meridian massages and just go for liposuction!! At the 6-month mark the pain is completely gone. It was fine when I stayed still, but there used to be a slight ache if someone touched or bumped into me. Now there's none of that discomfort at all and they feel just like my original arms. The scars are still there, but a lot of the redness has faded so they're lighter, and I think they'll look even more natural over time


I had arm liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho! They definitely slimmed down into a nice straight line, there was barely any bruising and it faded quickly It seems like three weeks is enough for a full recovery Right now there's no bruising or swelling, nothing hurts, and I'm so, so satisfied


I had liposuction on my love handles and saddlebags plus hip fat grafting The scars aren't visible at all, nothing to worry about For the first few days the bruising and swelling were shocking, but after a while they went right down Sleeping and sitting on the toilet were painful and uncomfortable I didn't have much fat so they couldn't place it in many spots, which is a shame, but I'm glad I did it. Once it settles it lasts for good, right? haha


I had my surgery with Dr. Yoosuk Chung! After surgery the line became naturally prettier and clothes sit well on me, so I'm satisfied! He shaped them so nicely that they look good even without a bra hehe At 6 months post-op the scars are only slightly visible and there's no bruising or swelling at all! The bruising and swelling after surgery went down quickly, and they faded faster with the fat grafting than with the liposuction. Apart from the recovery needed for the liposuction itself, the pain, bruising and swelling all went away quickly and the line came out beautifully, so I'm very happy !!


The most satisfying thing after upper arm liposuction was how clearly the arm line came together. I used to be self-conscious about my arms in short sleeves, but now they look much slimmer and I'm happy with it. The biggest thing I notice is how much better clothes fit than before. The scars have faded a lot over time and now you can't really tell unless you look closely. Recovery was faster than I expected, so there wasn't much discomfort. There was bruising and swelling early on, but most of it went down after about 2-3 weeks and there's almost none now. As long as you wear the compression garment and take care of things, the recovery process is manageable Overall, getting back to daily life wasn't difficult, and I became more satisfied with the results as time went on. It was such a satisfying procedure that I regret all the time I spent hesitating. Recovery went smoothly overall and the results exceeded my expectations, so I'm happy.


Large breasts were uncomfortable and I wanted that improved, and while I was at it I wanted the sagging skin at the sides and the surrounding area tidied up too. Dr. Yoosuk Chung gave a great consultation and the coordinator was kind and professional, so I trusted them and went ahead with surgery right away Now my chest feels lighter, my shoulders are more comfortable and clothes feel so much easier to wear ^^


The line has stayed nice the whole time and I've had no side effects or discomfort. At this point I honestly forget I even had surgery. There's still a tiny scar left, but it's so minor that it doesn't bother me at all! Recovery was already complete by the 2-3 month mark, and since then my legs have felt just like my original ones. Overall I'm so happy with it!!


It's already been 6 months since my surgery. Before surgery I couldn't wear short sleeves even in summer, but this year my arms are slim enough that I can, and I'm having a great time. The incision area is still noticeable, but it's lighter than at first and it's in a spot you can't see unless I raise my arm, so I think it'll keep fading with good care. At 6 months the swelling seems completely gone, and there's a slight tight feeling, but almost only when I fully extend my arm. I started exercising gradually from around the 3-4 month mark. At first even stretching was hard and I could barely do any strength work, but now I can do Pilates and weight training, so I'm happily working out alongside everything else! And in daily life there's no discomfort at all, I can do everything!! There was pain and discomfort early on after surgery, but as time passed the pain and discomfort kept shrinking while my satisfaction kept growing. Summer is here and I'm so happy thinking about wearing tank tops!! Even looking back now, choosing to have the surgery is one of the best things I've done in my life~!


It's been about a month since I had abdomen and love handle liposuction, thigh liposuction and hip dip fat grafting These are notes I jotted down along the way, and at the one-month mark the conclusion is that recovery was really fast and I love the line hehe They say there may still be swelling and that more will go down, so I'm looking forward to it Days 1-3 after surgery I basically slept nonstop like I'd passed out Around day 4 my condition suddenly (?) improved to the point where I didn't need a nap, and my appetite came back (I was craving ice cream and snacks) The swelling seemed to be going down through day 3, but then it suddenly puffed right back up (looking back, this was the peak swelling day) (But even with all that swelling, I could already feel the difference in my waist-to-hip line) I took off the compression garment for the first time. With it off, the bruising looked less severe than I expected (in the review photos I'd seen the bruising looked pretty violent (?), but at this level I have zero worries about bruising) Day 5 I washed my hair and started eating regular food again, craving carbonara for lunch and bossam for dinner At this level of energy I figured simple daily activities were possible, so I took my first walk after surgery (just around the apartment complex) Day 8 suture removal (I had full-body work done, but the scarred areas really are minimal, so I'm just grateful) Weighed myself for the first time in a while and I was actually about 1kg heavier than before surgery (but I'm not worried about it) I could go beyond my neighborhood and even watch a movie (my walk is still a bit awkward and shuffling like someone who had hemorrhoid surgery, but my facial swelling and general condition are fine enough to go out) Day 9 the pain used to feel like muscle soreness, a heavy pulling discomfort under the skin -> now it's more like a bruise, a surface-level soreness on the skin Day 15 first post-op care session at the clinic / compression garment alteration (top only) (Right before bed, it suddenly hit me: since day 3 after surgery, I haven't regretted the surgery even once) -- In weeks 2-3 I got complacent and neglected the hip dip area for a bit -- Day 23 (as of two days ago I've finished my second post-op care session) I'm now 2kg lighter than right before surgery, without any special exercise or diet


At the 3-month mark I could really feel the improvement in the line and the fat loss. The scars are still there a bit but they keep getting lighter! There's no bruising or swelling at all anymore. I also dieted after the lipo and lost about 5kg. I think that made the results even better. If you can add exercise on top, I think the results would be much better. Overall I'm extremely satisfied!


I had liposuction on my abdomen, love handles and arms with grafting to my hips, and I could feel the line change dramatically right after surgery As time passed the suctioned areas slimmed down even more, so these days I'm realizing that liposuction really does require patience hehe The hip grafting was done with stem cells, and maybe that's why it's holding up well without shrinking Since my line changed after surgery I've been working out harder too and fitting in workouts here and there has helped me stay firm as well! Exactly the lean-and-toned look I wanted!! I used to think being thin was the only pretty thing, but as I get older I find that curves where there should be curves, tucked in where it should be tucked in, and firm and toned is what looks pretty hehe The scars are basically invisible now Whether it's leggings, workout clothes or a dress, everything looks good on me, so my satisfaction just keeps going up over time~~


I had liposuction on my abdomen, love handles and bra line, and my satisfaction keeps growing as time goes on. The line is much more natural and smooth than it was at first, and I think I got the silhouette I wanted. The difference in how clothes fit is especially satisfying. The scars have faded so much that they barely register anymore, and recovery is now well behind me. Most of the swelling is gone and the results have settled in stably. Regardless of weight changes, my overall body line looks much more balanced. I feel more confident in photos too, and managing my figure feels easier than before. The results look more natural as time passes, so I'm happy. Overall it was a more satisfying experience than I had expected.


Honestly, I'm on the heavier side, so I worried a lot that my arms would end up too thin and look out of proportion with the rest of me. But there's nothing artificial about it at all, it blends naturally with my overall body shape while still being noticeably slimmer, so I'm very satisfied. I have no particular side effects, and occasionally I get a tingling feeling in the surgical area, but that's a normal part of the nerves coming back during recovery, so there's no real inconvenience in daily life. Early on the swelling seemed to be going down so slowly that I was quietly worried, but once I stopped fixating on it, at some point it had visibly settled. I'm really learning that time is the medicine for recovery. These days the line looks so natural that I sometimes forget I had surgery at all, and then I put on clothes I used to wear and get startled every time. Feeling how much roomier the once-tight upper arm area has become makes me really register the change: 'ah, they really did get slimmer.'


I'm eating well again so I've put weight back on, but it came back with the line still there and I find that amazing I had abdomen and love handle liposuction, thigh liposuction and hip dip fat grafting My weight actually went up but my clothing size went down, I have a waist, and my belly sticks out less than before. It goes in when I flex, which is so wild I wear fitted dresses often now There is a scar along the panty line but it doesn't really bother me Recovery is completely done and it's been ages since I even thought about it~~ I sometimes wonder if I really had surgery If I could go back I'd do full body Summer is coming so I need to cut back on eating again T_T


A month after surgery, a lot of the swelling has gone down and the overall line looks much more natural. At first I was worried because of the swelling, but recovery was faster than I expected and there was no real inconvenience in daily life. The bruising was there early on but faded until it barely registered, and the swelling is visibly decreasing as time goes on. In particular, the line in profile and from the front looks much more refined than before, which I'm happy about. I'm not fully recovered yet, but even at one month the change is clearly visible and I feel much better about photos. There's still a little residual swelling, but it feels like part of the process of settling in naturally. Overall the recovery process was easier than I expected, and I'm looking forward to the results more as time goes on. I'm excited to see how naturally and nicely it settles over the remaining recovery period. Thank you :)


The most satisfying part is how my face line came together naturally overall and my face looks smaller than before. The bruising and swelling resolved a long time ago, and these days I barely even register that I had surgery in daily life. People around me often say I look much slimmer than before, and I feel far less pressure when taking photos. Above all, with less stress about it, the little daily frustrations have decreased and I'm happy. Nine months on I'm still satisfied with the result, and if I had to choose again I'd make the same decision. ????


At first I couldn't tell because of the swelling, but once I put on summer clothes I could clearly see how nicely the line had come together!! It's only been a month so I can't say they feel fully like my own arms yet, but I'm already satisfied! For the first 1-2 weeks the bruising and scars were visible, but now only the insertion points show slightly? And even that is barely noticeable, so it didn't bother me. I kept loosening up my arms and armpits at home whenever I thought of it, and now I can raise them above my head without any trouble! Going forward I plan to keep it up with a diet and light exercise~~


Hello. It's been about 6 months since I had thigh liposuction and hip fat grafting. Before surgery my thigh line was always a worry, and I lacked volume around my hips so my overall body balance felt off. Now, as time has passed, my thigh line has come together much more naturally and my hip line feels like it has settled to suit my body, so I'm satisfied. I had a stem cell procedure done at the same time, and at 6 months the best part is that the grafted area is holding naturally without looking excessive. The bruising and swelling I had early on have improved so much that they barely register now, and daily life is comfortable. I worried about scars at first too, but they've faded a lot over time so they're usually not very visible. The biggest difference before and after surgery is definitely how clothes fit. In pants my thighs look slim, and with the hip line filled in the overall silhouette looks much prettier. At 6 months the line feels like it has settled in more stably, and the natural improvement in my body balance is what satisfies me most.


My upper arms, which had been a complex of mine since I was very young, now fall in a straight line that anyone can see. I honestly wondered if it was even possible, and I'm so happy that it worked that I'm already wearing short-sleeved shirts all the time. As for scars, ha~~~~~ I can't see them either. They're partly hidden in the armpit crease, and I'm too busy looking at my arm line to even notice the scars They told me I bruise more than most people, but unlike the reviews I'd seen on other channels I didn't get a single blue or purple bruise. Just some greenish and yellowish bruising, and even that faded quickly. As for recovery, right when you think you're dying it improves in a sudden jump. The first 3 days are a bit rough, day 4 gets much better, days 7-9 are hard again, and then day 10 gets much better again. I think I was already wearing short sleeves from around the two-week mark haha


6 months post-op. The swelling and the line seem to have settled and daily life has become comfortable. The line settled so nicely that people often ask if I've actually lost weight. The scars have lightened in a lot of places, though I'm still applying the ointment diligently. I used to never even consider tank tops, but now I wear them proudly (?) along with short sleeves. I'm so happy that I'll get to stay cool from this summer on :)


Right now there's no discomfort at all in daily life, and things feel so natural that I forget I had surgery. As time passed, almost all the swelling went down and the line seems to have settled in stably. The most satisfying part is definitely the change in my overall silhouette. With my abdomen and flank lines refined, clothes fit much more cleanly, and at the same weight I look slimmer than before. The difference feels even bigger when I wear fitted clothes. The abdominal line that used to bother me before surgery has improved a lot so my satisfaction is high, and the results look more natural as time goes on. I've had no particular discomfort so far and I'm doing well, and overall I think it was a satisfying change.


The most satisfying part is that with my upper arms and accessory breast tissue refined, I can wear tank tops and short sleeves with far more confidence. The scars barely register, and there's a slight stinging feeling when I do strength training or exert myself, but not enough to disrupt daily life. When it occasionally feels a bit knotted I massage it lightly with a gua sha tool, and if the line starts to bother me I plan to go in for a care session now and then. My overall satisfaction is very high, and I think having the surgery timed just before summer was a good choice. Going forward I'll keep up light strength training and consistent aftercare to maintain firmness.


The scars are still slightly visible which is a bit of a worry, but not to the point where they stand out, so I wear sleeveless tops often ^^ Now that the fat is gone I'm working hard on building muscle~ Since I paid a lot for the surgery I don't want it to go to waste, so I'm also watching my diet, and I think I'll be able to dress light this summer ^^


After dieting, the thing that stressed me most was the sagging skin on my upper arms. I lost the weight, but exercise couldn't improve the loose skin, so I ended up having an arm lift. The part I'm most satisfied with after surgery is definitely the arm line. My inner arms used to droop so I was very self-conscious about clothes, but now they look much cleaner and smoother overall. There was almost no pain, less than I expected. Even right after surgery it wasn't too hard, and getting back to daily life was relatively easy. Maybe because it was mainly about trimming loose skin, the recovery process wasn't very uncomfortable. The scars aren't especially noticeable. They sit along the inner arm line so they're usually hidden, and they're getting more natural over time. There was no bruising at all after surgery, and there was some swelling early on since it was surgery after all, but it went down naturally over time. Right now there's no swelling and my arm shape has settled in stably. Overall the recovery process was easier than I expected and I'm very satisfied with the result. I worried a lot about the loose arm skin left after dieting, but now I wear short sleeves and sleeveless tops confidently and I'm really happy. Clothes fit so much better too.


It's already been 6 months since my surgery! Right now it's so unremarkable that I forget I even had it done. I'm only doing scar care and living my life normally! Some parts of the scars are already unnoticeable and they seem to keep improving, which I'm glad about! I hope they keep getting better as I keep up the care! Only the very beginning after surgery is hard, and after that, seeing how much slimmer my arms are, I feel so glad I did it!


It's been exactly one month since I had arm liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho. Before surgery my line looked heavy overall, but now, even with swelling still left, I can feel how much more refined it is than before. In clothes especially, my upper arms look less bulky and the line feels like it's coming through, so I'm satisfied. It's not the final line yet, but seeing this much change at one month, I think it'll look much more natural and prettier once more swelling goes down. After surgery, the first 3 days or so had the worst swelling. But from then on the swelling gradually went down, and recovery was faster than I expected so it wasn't very uncomfortable. I could manage light walks and daily activities without trouble after surgery, which I liked most. There was quite a bit of bruising early on, but it's almost fully resolved now. Overall the swelling seems about 80% gone, with a little still left in my arms. The bra line area especially feels like the swelling has barely gone down, which worried me at first, but the clinic staff told me the bra line is naturally the last and slowest area to settle, so I'm reassured and waiting it out. The scars aren't as noticeable as I expected, and I'm keeping up with regenerative cream. Overall recovery was quick and getting back to daily life was easy, so for now I'm satisfied with both the improvement in the line and the speed of recovery.


I had hip fat grafting at the same time, and with the bulges on both outer thighs gone and moved over to my hips, my legs look longer and I'm so satisfied If there's one regret, it's that I should have done knee liposuction too~ haha Dieting never got rid of the fat above and beside my knees T_T The scars are barely visible and they were easy to care for early on Summer is coming, so I want to keep up the care and wear lots of pretty clothes!!


Posting my abdomen and love handle liposuction review~ The results were so good that I relaxed and left everything to the lipo, and even so I really don't gain weight. Considering how little I've managed things, I've only put on a tiny bit hehe Since I can now see the speed of fat loss and the line so much faster than before, I'm taking on a serious diet again....hehe Reading other reviews makes me want lipo on other areas too... and since TheLINE puts safety first, I'd choose TheLINE again for a return visit! Thank you TheLINE <3


I had stem cell breast grafting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung and my breast line improved a lot! I used to be completely flat and now I comfortably fill an A cup. The incision in the armpit where the fat was harvested is completely invisible, so daily life is easy too. By around 2 months recovery was fully done and I can't even tell I had surgery. Before, even an A cup bra gaped and was uncomfortable, but now it fits perfectly!


It's early summer so I'm wearing short sleeves now, and thanks to my changed arm line I wear short-sleeved clothes with much more confidence! I used to only wear loose, oversized things, so having options feels great~ I applied ointment now and then and the scars are fading faster than I expected, and the swelling seems basically gone now. Right after surgery 6 months ago my arms already looked noticeably different, which amazed me, and now they feel light and comfortable as if they'd always been mine, so I'm satisfied and glad I did it!


Just when the fat gathering on my inner thighs was stressing me out, TheLINE made me a beautifully smooth thigh gap I finally have the thigh gap I only dreamed about T_T Personally I was very satisfied with the improvement in the line right after surgery, and apart from residual swelling it seems to have stayed that way. No lumpy line or hardening at all, just a smooth straight line where the thigh fat was refined, I love it!! As for scars, I wasn't good about applying ointment or taking care of them, so a faint mark like pigmentation is left.. but it's faint enough not to bother me, and above all the lipo openings were made minimally in spots you can't see, so sometimes I even forget they're surgical marks he he And the most surprising part, the speed of recovery, all I can say is that it was insane. People say liposuction hurts ridiculously and takes forever to get back to daily life, but I was back at work in 4 days. That's how little pain there was and how fast the recovery was... stem cells are insane... It's 6 months post-op so the bruising and swelling are all gone! That said, it took about a month for the bruising and swelling to fully resolve. Since it's the legs I move around more, so I think it was a bit slower than the upper body Other than that there was no trouble with daily activities, but I'd recommend doing it about 2 months before a season with more exposure, like summer. Honestly, there's so little pain and such fast recovery that I could do it 10 more times if asked. It's the most satisfying surgery I've had, and I want to thank Dr. Jungjae Baek, who operated safely so the result would be satisfying, and coordinator Boyoung who consulted with me... (thank you so much for recommending hip dip grafting when I did lower body lipo, I hesitated a lot at the time but I'd have really missed out if I hadn't, I'm so, so happy <3 everyone says my hips are unreal and compliments my figure like crazy) And the kind clinic staff on top of that. If anyone I know says they're getting lipo, I'll tell them to go to TheLINE, no question ^^!!!


I had thigh liposuction and hip grafting. The line feels improved compared to before, and the scars still look like little dots! They told me they'll disappear later so I'm waiting, and the recovery process hurt but now it doesn't hurt at all The inner thigh fat is gone so I'm so satisfied!


It's almost 3 months since my surgery with Dr. Yoosuk Chung and the swelling is completely gone now, and the swelling at the tip seems mostly gone too Above all, it came out so naturally, I love it hehe My bridge is naturally higher and people can't tell I had surgery. He gave me exactly the nose I wanted, so I'm so grateful to him!!! And looking at my profile at 45 degrees the line comes through too, I love it hehe


I'm a woman in my 20s enjoying the results of abdominal and love handle liposuction It's been about 6 months now and recently I've been wearing size S comfortably I don't eat just anything, but seeing myself eating happily with less worry than before surgery makes me think I made the right choice People around me ask what kind of diet I did hehe Part of me wants to keep this clinic to myself but I also feel a place this good deserves to be known, so I'm leaving this post Swelling and bruising do happen, though they say it varies by person. In my case the swelling doesn't last long, so it went down quickly. The consulting coordinator at the clinic explained things well and the doctor's skill was trustworthy, which is why I chose this clinic and felt it was worth recommending I hope you all read plenty of posts and make a decision you won't regret


I'm at a normal weight but my body fat percentage is on the high side, so I had a lot of soft fat all over and my body shape had no clear line. Now it feels like all that softness has been tidied up. Rather than looking dramatically thin, the biggest thing I notice is how much cleaner my silhouette looks in clothes. My waist and thighs especially feel clearly defined, and I'm satisfied with that. There aren't many scars and they're small, so they don't really stand out. If you look closely there are still faint traces, but they've faded a lot over time. Recovery was also better than I had expected. The bruising and swelling were worst in the first 2-3 weeks and mostly went down after about a month. Now there's basically no bruising or swelling and no discomfort in daily life at all. At 9 months I feel like my current line is essentially the final one, and rather than expecting bigger changes, this feels like the stage where maintenance matters. Overall I'm happy with how naturally the line came together, and going forward I plan to manage things while keeping my weight steady.


Hello! I'm one of those people who took on every kind of stress because no matter how much I dieted or lost weight, my upper arms wouldn't budge. After a lot of deliberation I finally took the plunge with upper arm liposuction, and it's been a month. The first thing I want to show off is how visibly the line has changed The way clothes fall on me is completely different now, so every time I look in the mirror I think "ah, this is why everyone spends the money and time on surgery." The satisfaction is enormous. The big, tight swelling from the early days has mostly gone down. There's a little residual swelling left, but not enough to affect daily life at all. If you've been stressed about a long-standing complex, I really think you'll be satisfied with upper arm liposuction!!


It's been 3 months since my inner thigh and saddlebag liposuction It feels like things have settled to a reasonable degree! At 3 months there's no bruising or swelling and I'm only doing scar care~ I think liposuction is a surgery where exactly 3 days are hard After that recovery was fast and nothing was uncomfortable..! I should have done it sooner~~!


It's been 3 months since my arm liposuction I can see that my accessory breast area and the back line of my arms have slimmed down The bulge above my elbows is gone too, and now I buy clothes without worrying about the sleeves being tight and they mostly all fit! If I don't say anything, everyone assumes I lost a ton of weight hehe The scars have lightened a lot and I don't think they're visible unless I raise both arms The bruising is all gone but I think there's still a bit of swelling When I wake up my arms feel puffy along with everything else? They say it keeps going down until 6 months, which means there's more to come, so I'm looking forward to it The skin on the back of my arms still feels a little firm to the touch, but only I would notice, so it doesn't bother me~


It has been 3 months since I got Mentor implants, and the bruising is completely gone and most of the swelling has gone down too, so it feels comfortable. Nothing bothers me in daily life anymore, so I feel like I have fully recovered! The scars still show a reddish line, but they have faded a lot compared to before. I am really happy with the shape and the size after surgery, and my line definitely looks better in whatever I wear. I think I just need to keep up with scar care!


This is my arm and abdomen liposuction review. At this point the line feels completely settled, and I can clearly tell that my body shape itself has changed. With the excess fat on my abdomen and arms cleaned up, the overall silhouette has become much slimmer and more balanced. The visible improvement in my line is far bigger than the change on the scale, so I am very satisfied. The swelling and bruising I had early on mostly cleared up between months 2 ~3, and now I do not feel any swelling or lumpiness at all. I have no discomfort in daily life, it feels completely natural. The scars have not disappeared entirely, but they have faded a lot over time so they are not very noticeable. You can see them up close, but in daily life they hardly bother me. Recovery was steady overall, and it naturally got better as time went on. Looking back, only the early recovery period was a little hard, and after that it got easier and easier, to the point where I almost forget I had surgery. Considering the change in my line and the improvement in my body shape, I am more than satisfied, and I am keeping up my current condition with exercise and a proper diet. Looking at it now, I am happy with the result and I think it was really a good choice.


It has been 3 months since I had stem cell breast fat grafting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. Both the shape and the feel have become natural. I went through a second session, and the bras that used to have empty space now fill up nicely. The grafting scars on my chest have faded a little, and they look like acne marks rather than surgical scars. The bruising and swelling are all gone. Overall the line has settled naturally and I am satisfied~!


I had my arm lift with Dr. Jaeho Cho back in winter, and now that time has passed and summer is coming, I can really see the effect! I am not wearing short sleeves yet, but even in fitted clothes there is no sagging skin, so the biggest effect is that my clothes hang well now!!! As for the scars, the part on the arm that rubs against clothing is still a little red so I think it will take more time, but the armpit area is almost invisible! I am hoping the arm part fades like the armpit did! Time really is the cure~ Just like at 3 months, when I raise my arm or reach for something high up there is still a pulling feeling, so I am holding back as much as I can. Overall I am very satisfied^^


I had 360 degree arm liposuction, axillary breast liposuction and an arm lift with Dr. Jaeho Cho~ It is month 6 now, and since a lot of skin was removed there is still some residual swelling that keeps settling down~ The scars have faded really noticeably!!! They keep getting lighter and I am so happy about that part!! Right now I have zero bruising and swelling! I am going to keep dieting and lose a bit more weight~~


I am naturally a bit muscular, so I knew I would not end up with skinny bone arms~ Still, the bulging side line improved and clothes that used to feel tight around my arms now fit loosely, so I am satisfied~^^ The scar is on the inner armpit so it is not noticeable and I barely think about it~ The color is still dark though.. it will get better over time, right? The bruising and swelling mostly disappear after about a month~ Right now I feel completely fine~ My coworkers are really curious about it haha If it were not for the cost, everyone would want their upper arms done haha Since it is surgery after all, making up your mind at the start is the hardest part.. and for 3 to 4 weeks after surgery there is bruising, swelling and numbness, but once that period passes there is nothing difficult left, only the joy of a smaller size~~ Arms are a really hard area to slim down with exercise, so I am glad I chose surgery, which gives a much clearer result than injection treatments~


No matter how much I dieted my upper arms never slimmed down, and my upper body fat made me look heavier than my actual weight, so it was a big source of stress. I considered Lams too, but after reading reviews saying it did not do much I decided on upper arm liposuction, checked the doctor's background, had a consultation and went straight into surgery. It is month 3 now. My upper arms used to be pure fat type, but now they are fairly slim hehe I did it without telling my boyfriend, and when he happened to touch my arm he was shocked at how thin it had gotten. The bruising was all gone within 1 to 2 weeks after surgery, and the scars are still visible but I think they will disappear over time. I am already satisfied, but I hope the residual swelling goes down soon so they get even slimmer hehehe


It has been three months since Dr. Jaeho Cho did my arm liposuction and arm lift~ Before surgery the sagging on my arms bothered me the most, but now I can see that the line is much cleaner and I am satisfied. In particular, the sagging when I raise my arms has decreased a lot and I feel slimmer overall. My arm line also looks much neater in clothes than before. The scars are still there but they have faded a lot, and since they are on the inner arm they are not very visible day to day. The bruising lasted about 2 to 3 weeks and I think a little swelling still remains. Early on it felt tight and uncomfortable, but it recovered naturally as time passed. Overall the recovery was fast, so daily life was no problem and I am happy with the result~


The excess fat on my upper arms bothered me, so I had my arms done together with my abdomen and hip grafting~ Dr. Yoongeun Kim did it as stem cell liposuction I had a lot of fat on my upper arms and the upper arm root, the part connecting the armpit and the arm, so those were treated too! The manager and the doctor made the consultation completely comfortable with nothing embarrassing, and both explained things very professionally And the most important part! I chose it because there are only two incisions on the arm and none on the elbow Thanks to that the scars are barely visible now, and the ones in the armpit are almost invisible! My weight was not that high, but after giving birth I stopped taking care of myself and put on a lot of excess fat, and now it has been cleaned up so neatly that my shoulder and arm line look so pretty I only had my arms done and did not touch my shoulders, but even my shoulder line looks better, so I am really satisfied!!


Dr. Jaeho Cho did my arm and armpit liposuction! It is almost month 6 and I have recovered so completely that I hardly remember having the procedure ~ The scars, my arm movement and everything else cause no trouble in daily life, and above all my arm line has gotten slim, so I am living very happily with it haha


It is almost 4 months since surgery and the swelling has definitely all gone down, which I am happy about. Right after surgery I was worried the swelling would never go away..! And above all, with the under-eye fat gone I look less hollow and people ask me if I am tired much less than before, which I love. Dark circles were the part of my face that worried me the most.. I have chronic rhinitis so pigmentation plus dark circles made my eye area very dark, and the under-eye fat procedure seems to have solved that concern to a good degree, so I feel I made the right choice at TheLINE


Right after surgery there was more swelling and stiffness than I expected, but after about a month I could clearly see that my overall arm line had been cleaned up. In particular, my upper arms stand out less in clothes, so I am very satisfied. I used to feel self-conscious wearing fitted short sleeves or sleeveless tops, but now I can definitely feel that the line is slimmer. The bruising mostly faded over about 2 to 3 weeks, and right now it is barely noticeable. The swelling has also gone down a lot compared to the early days, so there is almost no discomfort in daily life. There is still a slightly puffy feeling in the mornings, but I think it will look even more natural as time passes. The scars are just small dots at the incision sites on the inner arm so they were not very noticeable, and with diligent care they seem to be fading. People around me would not notice unless I told them. Overall the recovery was better than expected, and as long as you wear the compression garment and take care of things, returning to daily life was no trouble. They said this is not the final line yet so I am looking forward to more, and so far I am recovering happily


# Movement and recovery A hectic month has gone by, and now I can raise my arms all the way over my head, it feels so comfortable. Just a month ago I had to be careful even washing my hair, and now they feel like my own arms again,, The bruising is completely gone without a trace! Putting on bruise cream every night before bed and wearing the compression garment faithfully even when it felt stuffy really made a big difference, I think. # Swelling and pain The major swelling seems to be almost gone, but there is still a little pain when I press hard on the skin. Honestly that makes me happy! Pain still being there means there is that much swelling left to go down, so I am recovering cheerfully, looking forward to how much slimmer my arms will get as the pain fades. I am applying scar ointment every day, and since my recovery is fast I think the scars will lighten soon. # Starting maintenance After about a month, the pain and discomfort are quickly forgotten, and thanks to the slim arm line I see every time I look in the mirror my satisfaction is 200%. My old eating habits made maintenance a bit of a hurdle, but now I am going to add exercise and manage things seriously. I want to lock in this hard-earned line and make it even firmer with exercise!


I can feel my arm line changing more as time goes by. From the front, the bulging drumstick shape that used to bother me feels completely gone. Thanks to systematic aftercare the lumpy parts have mostly loosened up and the stiff feeling is much better..I was able to go about daily life without any issue long ago. I am looking forward to the changes that keep coming. The bruising is now completely gone, and the scars will need more time, but their location and size do not bother me at all. Once the swelling went down my chest looks much more natural and pretty The incision sites still sting a little now and then, but even with movements that engage the pectoral muscles it feels comfortable and there is no foreign body sensation at all. Picking out clothes in the morning is so much fun now.


Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my abdominal liposuction and upper arm liposuction It has already been 3 months and my line has been cleaned up perfectly with no unusual side effects at all Since I am bad at dieting my weight is the same before and after surgery, but the line is clearly different, right?! If I had controlled my weight it would have been even more dramatic..I am really going to try dieting again Anyway the surgery went really well!! If anyone is hesitating because they want a clear line or they worry about side effects, I recommend it~


Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my abdomen and love handle liposuction I especially like my waistline and overall the belly fat that used to make me look heavy is gone and the line has come in, so I am very satisfied It is month 3 now and they said more residual swelling will go down, so I am looking forward to seeing how it changes


I can feel that my abdominal volume has decreased overall, and I am especially satisfied with how the love handle line at my flanks has been cleaned up. I do not bruise easily, so the bruising was all gone within a month. The major swelling also settled early. I can see the scars getting lighter as time goes on. I think they will look much more natural with more time. The whole recovery process went smoothly and there was no real discomfort in daily life. Now that I am at month 6 the line has settled and I am satisfied.


Dr. Joongjae Baek did liposuction on my arms, upper arm roots, abdomen and love handles! I can definitely feel that my overall line has changed after surgery The scars have faded a lot There was less swelling than I expected from the start so it was comfortable, and now I live without any discomfort, as if this had always been my body Summer is coming and I am so excited hehe


I had surgery on February 3, so it is month 3 now. I am completely satisfied with the result, there is no dangling skin on my upper arms so nothing bulges out at the back of my arms in clothes, I am fully satisfied and I really feel the difference when I get dressed! The scars are still fairly noticeable, they were red early on and now they have gotten a bit darker. Still I am applying scar ointment diligently and taking care of them And the bruising is completely gone now. The swelling is mostly gone too, though on days I overuse my arms I feel some puffiness around the incision sites. When clothing brushes against the incision sites it still stings a little Recovery is going well without trouble, I just need to keep up the scar care


Hello~ It has already been a month since my breast implant surgery through an inframammary incision! Here comes my review I had it done by Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE! First of all, at one month the shape is really alive... it looked pretty right after surgery too, but now it has settled more naturally and I love the line The silhouette in clothes is completely different The pain was basically gone from about week 1, and now that a month has passed it does not hurt at all I can do active movements and stretching without trouble, so daily life feels 100% back to normal The bruising completely disappeared after about 2 weeks and the swelling went down noticeably around week 3, so now there is almost no discomfort It definitely feels much better than at the start The scar is along the inframammary line and after a month it is much lighter than right after surgery It has not disappeared completely yet, but it is not noticeable enough to bother me in daily life My recovery also felt fast and it keeps getting better Overall I only feel that this was a choice I do not regret hehe If you are hesitating, use reviews like this as a reference~


Dr. Jaeho Cho, Chief Director, did my abdominal liposuction! It has been about three months and the bruising is completely gone and the swelling feels like it has gone down a lot Maybe about 20 percent of the minor pain is still left When I wear pants that squeeze my abdomen there is a tingling pain around the area? Overall a lot of belly fat is gone so I am satisfied, and the swelling feels much better, and they told me the swelling I cannot see will keep going down, so I am looking forward to it even more~~


Dr. Joongjae Baek did my 360 degree arm and axillary breast liposuction I have gained a bit of weight since month 1 but my arms are the same, so I am very satisfied ! Arms are an area that does not slim down easily even with exercise, so I made up my mind and had surgery, and I am especially happy that the bulge I used to see from the front is now a straight line hehe Crossing my arms was not easy before, but now even with my arms crossed and seen from the front, the side fat does not stick out, which I love! I chose TheLINE because it is well known and because they said the surgery is done safely, and it was a choice I do not regret! Thank you~~


A month has passed since my abdomen and love handle liposuction and the bruising is definitely gone! There may still be some swelling left, but it is not major swelling, so I hope the residual swelling goes down and the lines get even cleaner I am getting separate bio-bond care but it has not disappeared yet ! My belly sticks out a bit because of visceral fat, and managing that is somehow both easy and hard...... The scars are still there so I need to apply the ointment more diligently Oh and the love handle area does not feel like my own flesh yet, so I think it needs more time ! And the abdomen matters, but doing the love handles together was really a great call !! Once you do the love handles, everything you wear fits differently ^^


About 3 months after arm liposuction I can clearly see that the line has been cleaned up a lot. At first I could not tell because of the swelling, but over time the outer line of my upper arms became much smoother. In particular my arms look less bulky in short sleeves than before, so I am very happy. They even feel a bit lighter and the fit of my clothes is definitely different. Right after surgery the bruising spread wider than I expected, but it almost disappeared over about 2 to 3 weeks. The swelling was quite noticeable for about a month and I could feel a difference between morning and evening, but now it looks almost natural. There were some hard, lumpy spots too, but with consistent care and time they softened a lot. The scars are at the incision sites on the inner arm so they are not very noticeable. They were reddish early on and although they have faded a lot they are still there. I applied scar ointment consistently, which I think made recovery faster. Overall the recovery process felt longer than I expected, but at around 3 months the result is clearly visible so I am satisfied. I worried because of the early swelling, but I am glad I waited. Right now my arms feel naturally slimmer, so I am much more satisfied.


Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my arm liposuction and arm lift. It feels like just yesterday that I had the surgery and was doing my aftercare diligently, time really flies. Honestly, since a lift was included I worried the most about scars. But now, about 9 months later, almost all the redness is gone and only a thin white line remains. Because the doctor placed the line where it is hardly visible, people have no idea I had surgery even when I walk around in short sleeves. Above all, my upper arm line has been cleaned up really well. Before, when I pressed my arms against my body the fat pushed out to the sides and made me look bulky, but now it falls smoothly with nothing extra, which still amazes me. With liposuction alone the skin would have sagged, but doing the lift together made it firm and tight, so the way clothes look on me is completely different. It does not look artificially carved out, it looks like I slimmed down naturally in a way that fits my body, so I am very satisfied. I no longer have to try to hide my upper arms, so these days getting dressed is my favorite thing hehehe


It has already been 9 months since I had full abdomen, saddlebag and thigh liposuction and hip dip fat grafting Over those 9 months I gained weight again here and there, but fat definitely does not stick the way it did before surgery Even when I gained a little it came off quickly again I think the fat cells themselves really did decrease Especially the back love handles and the hip dip grafting area that worried me so much are holding their line really well, so I am very satisfied!! The go-to place for a beautiful back line!!! There were very few incisions to begin with, but now the scars are so faint you have to look very closely to see them This is my first summer with a prettier line, and I am so excited for the season of showing skin><


Time really flies and I think right now is when I am most satisfied. Early on the swelling made it hard to feel the change but as time passed I could feel the line getting cleaner, and now it just looks naturally slimmer. I am most satisfied with how the flank line was cleaned up♥♥ The fit of my clothes has changed, so being able to wear things without hesitation is a really big deal. It does not look overdone, the best part is that it slimmed down naturally, “as if my body had always been like this.” With the aftercare included it feels like the result holds well too, so I have been very satisfied so far :) Eating habits, swelling care and daily routine all come together, so I feel like the result stays satisfying!


It is month 3 now and I can feel even more that my arm line has been cleaned up compared to before There was still swelling up to month 1 but it seems to have gone down more It is at the point where I can wear a tank top without worrying much! The redness in the scars is gone and they have turned brown The scars are still visible so I am applying scar ointment consistently The bruising faded really quickly and the swelling seems completely gone now


I had abdomen, love handle, thigh and knee liposuction plus hip fat grafting! The bruising was all gone in the first month or two, and I have two scars in spots that underwear covers The scars have faded a lot so they are barely visible Compared to friends who had surgery at other clinics I had less pain and recovered really fast, so from the first week on I was moving around on my own and my friends said it was amazing hehe Even though a lot of areas were treated, recovery was definitely fast As for the line, my overall body proportions improved and my belly fat and hip dips, my biggest complexes, changed completely, so I am very satisfied I removed so much that I was afraid of losing firmness, but since I kept up with exercise after surgery my firmness is holding well For lines that exercise absolutely cannot fix, liposuction and fat grafting seem to be the answer hehe


I cannot believe it is already month 6, my recovery was so amazingly fast that I almost forget I had liposuction... I had all sorts of worries before surgery, but the surgery went safely and well, so once again I feel glad that I chose TheLINE. There were no side effects from over-suctioning or any of the commonly mentioned side effects at all, thanks to Dr. Joongjae Baek, who is like a second father to me ... I recommend him endlessly to everyone around me The scars barely show either, to the point where you would think they are moles ha ha And Manager Boyoung Jung, who was so honest in the consultation and was responsible for 90 percent of my decision to have surgery! She considered everything within my budget and took great care of me, so thanks to her I was able to have a satisfying surgery. I will take good care of myself and keep building a pretty figure!^^


The change feels bigger in person than in photos, so my satisfaction is high The difference in my waist and back is really big, and even after losing weight and gaining it back the line is holding. The scars are still there a little, but they are in spots that are not very visible so it does not really matter After surgery I can dress like I did when I was younger, which I love I can wear tight things without holding my stomach in!!


It is month 1 after my arm and axillary breast surgery~ At one month I can definitely feel that the line has changed. Clothes that used to be tight around my arms feel loose now. There is still a little swelling, but I am slowly starting to stretch so I think it will go down soon. The scars are still there but they have faded a lot. I bought regenerative ointment at the clinic to apply consistently. The bruising is almost entirely gone everywhere else. Only the upper chest area still has a faint green tinge. Overall, after about 10 days I do not think there was anything painful or difficult at all. Once the swelling went down, wearing the compression garment was not that hard either. (I only wore it at night while sleeping.) Around week 2 I was going out to meet people and had no problem with daily life at all. Everyone asked me if recovery is really this fast. I am very satisfied with the recovery process too. I hope the swelling goes down even more soon.


After 3 months I even forget I had surgery hehe First of all the line is completely different so I look much more delicate. I got careless after surgery and hit my heaviest weight ever, but the prettier line is holding,, I should have done it sooner. The bio-bond is almost all gone and the tight feeling is gone too. My lower belly is still a little firm, so I think once that goes the effect will stand out even more! I love that I can see the shape of my navel changing. I am satisfied that a big roll of belly fat does not fold over when I sit down. These days I find myself trying bolder clothes. If you want liposuction done safely without side effects, I recommend TheLINE~!! For reference, I had mine with Dr. Joongjae Baek!


At about 3 months the swelling seems mostly gone and I can raise my arms well My arms were not that thick to begin with so the volume removed was not large, but I can definitely see they are slimmer than before! I had surgery in winter and now that it is turning from spring to summer and I am pulling out thin fitted long sleeves and short sleeves, I can see the fit is different. The scars are invisible unless I raise my arms all the way up Even then one side looks like the scar has almost disappeared, and the other still has some left but I think it will fade away For aftercare I had 1 session at a manual care shop and 2 sessions of the aftercare the clinic provides The pain is almost gone now. If someone grabs me hard I flinch a bit more than usual..? The surgery itself was a bit hard, but seeing the result afterwards makes me happy!!


My thick arms bothered me so I looked around and had surgery at TheLINE Dr. Joongjae Baek did my arm liposuction From the reviews and the consultation I felt he was highly skilled and I trusted him with the surgery It is month 6 now and as expected I am satisfied


At month 3 it feels more cleaned up overall than before If I combine it with a proper diet I think it will get even cleaner Since my skin is pale the scars are still visible, but nothing around them hurts so I am going to watch a bit longer~ The lumpiness and sensation in my belly have almost fully returned and I feel less stressed when getting dressed, which I love


About 9 months after surgery the overall line feels almost completely settled. Early on there were parts that felt a little unnatural, but now that awkwardness is gone and everything has settled naturally into my body. The change in my silhouette in clothes is what I notice the most. The scars have not disappeared completely yet, but compared to the beginning they have faded a lot and are less noticeable. For me they are not something I think about in daily life, so I am living without much inconvenience. The swelling and minor lumpiness also settled over time, and right now there is nothing particularly uncomfortable or bothersome. Even to the touch it feels much more natural than before. The result definitely stabilizes and satisfaction goes up as time passes, so if you are worried about your early progress, I felt it is worth giving it some time and watching. As of now I am satisfied with the overall result, and if you are still thinking about it, I think it is fine to compare realistically and then decide!


It is past month 6 now so I think this is close to the final line. Overall the line has been cleaned up to a certain degree and it feels like it is staying that way! I am satisfied with the result and I will take good care of it so it lasts.


Dr. Jaeho Cho did my stem cell arm liposuction. First of all I can definitely feel that the line has been cleaned up. It feels neater overall? The fit of my clothes is clearly different. I have keloid-prone skin so scarring mattered to me and thankfully they are barely visible. But even when I gain a little weight back, fat definitely does not stick to the liposuctioned areas, it seems to gather in the areas I did not have done. So now I am thinking about getting liposuction on another area too! Personally I felt it improved a lot between months 3 and 6. The bruising and swelling were quite noticeable early on, and after month 3 the residual swelling gradually started to go down, and by around month 6 it looked almost natural. Right now there is no swelling or bruising at all. The overall recovery felt slower and more frustrating than I expected early on but the result showed more and more as time passed. There were moments in between when I wondered “did this go well?”, but after month 6 my satisfaction went up. I think if you all wait, the swelling will go down and your line will come in hehe


It has been a month since Dr. Joongjae Baek did my arm liposuction The swelling seems to have gone down a lot, so the line feels a bit cleaner The scars are barely visible, only a slight brown color remains There is no pain or discomfort in daily life at all, though I still feel a little discomfort when I raise my arms Seen from the side the line is much cleaner, so I am looking forward to when the swelling is completely gone The fat that used to stick out has been cleaned up a lot Overall, after about a month you have almost nothing to worry about with bruising or scars


Dr. Jaeho Cho did my abdominal liposuction and abdominoplasty together After surgery the sagging skin clearly improved, which I love It came out very naturally, the scars are healing very well and my recovery felt very fast The incision line is clean too The bruising and swelling are almost gone now Only the first month was a little hard, after that there was no discomfort in daily life at all I think I just need to take care of it properly


It is already month 9 since my thigh and knee liposuction and hip fat grafting! So far I am keeping both my weight and my reduced measurements stable. Honestly I eat noticeably more now than when I was dieting hard right after surgery. Surprisingly, I have not put on much excess fat or gained weight. I feel much less stress about rebound so I am living comfortably without diet obsession! The hip fat grafting I worried about the most also took very well. I was quietly concerned because people say the volume drops over time, but thankfully the original volume is holding almost exactly~ There is no lumpiness or uncomfortable foreign body sensation at all, and by now it has settled in softly and naturally like my own flesh At around 9 months it is so comfortable that I sometimes even forget I had surgery!


About 3 months have passed and the line feels much more settled now. Compared to month 1, more swelling has gone down and I can feel my arms are thinner and smoother overall. In particular the side view and the triceps line at the back have been cleaned up noticeably, so I am satisfied. Before, when I raised my arm the fat would spread out, but that has decreased a lot so it looks much more natural and slim now. Seeing my arm line cleaned up in clothes makes the change feel even bigger. The scars are visible if you look closely but they have faded a lot, and in daily life they do not really bother me. They keep getting fainter as time passes so I feel my recovery is going well. The bruising almost disappeared within the first 2 to 3 weeks, and the swelling went down a lot after about a month. There is almost none now, so there is no discomfort in daily life at all. Overall the recovery process was easier than expected and the result came out naturally, so I am satisfied. It feels more natural as time goes on, so I am looking forward to further changes.


I kept dieting consistently after surgery and my overall line feels much slimmer and cleaner, so I am very satisfied. In particular my abdomen, love handles and back line have been noticeably cleaned up, so my figure looks much more balanced. I had repeated diets in the past so I was worried about skin firmness, but I think the surgery is why the line came out this well. Early on, for about a month after surgery, there was some discomfort and swelling, but after that I recovered fast enough that daily life was not affected at all. The bruising and swelling also faded naturally over time, and now they are barely noticeable. The love handles that worried me the most were cleaned up so neatly that I feel great when I get dressed or look in the mirror. Overall, the biggest advantage is that the line came in so naturally that people wonder “did she even have surgery?” The scars are only slightly visible if you look very closely, and with consistent care I can feel them fading. I think it will keep getting better with more care, so I am not worried. Overall the recovery process was easier than expected and the result came out naturally, so I am satisfied!


I had abdomen, love handle and thigh liposuction and hip fat grafting~ It is month 3 now! I had my Waist to Saddlebags consultation with Dr. Yoongeun Kim, and he was thorough and really understood what I wanted, so I trusted him with it hehe I think it was a great choice, and maybe because it was stem cell surgery there was hardly any bruising and recovery was easy My thigh line got smooth and slim, and the hip dips that bothered me most were filled in beautifully, so I am really satisfied I wear leggings with more confidence and I take a lot more photos now I recommend it so much!!


Dr. Joongjae Baek did my breast fat grafting. The fat was taken from my thighs and placed in my chest. My thighs were naturally uneven, and all the fuss I made trying to fix that with exercise ended with a single liposuction. Now every time I work out the prettier lower body line stands out, so I exercise in a better mood. I am satisfied with the breast grafting result too. After one retouch session the size is the same as when it was still swollen at the very beginning. It holds well too.


It has been exactly 6 months since my surgery, and by now the swelling is almost completely gone and I can really feel my body line taking shape. My arms are much firmer than before, and with the fat gone from my abdomen my waistline feels smoothly defined. My weight has dropped about 8kg more since right after surgery, so my whole silhouette feels much lighter. There was quite a bit of bruising and swelling early on, but it gradually settled down around week 3, and from about a month in I had almost no trouble with daily life. The scars are still very faintly visible, but you have to look up close to see them, so they don't bother me day to day. The scars on my abdomen are healing a little slower than the ones on my arms, but I keep applying ointment and they are fading little by little. My skin texture came back naturally too, and I have no tightness or altered sensation. The way my tops fit has changed, so picking out clothes has become fun lately. My body feels so much lighter than before that I get less tired when I am active, and the change in my shape feels settled. Overall my recovery is going well, and the result looks more and more natural as time passes.


I am posting an update now that 9 months have passed since my liposuction. In the early stage there were symptoms such as swelling and tightness, but they gradually eased over time and everything is stable now. I have absolutely no discomfort in daily life. What I am most satisfied with is how my overall body line has been refined. My abdomen and waistline in particular have become noticeably slimmer, and the change in my shape feels bigger than the change in my weight. I am also happy that the way clothes fit is clearly different now. These days I keep it up with exercise as maintenance, and I feel far more motivated to take care of my body than before. The scars have faded a lot over time as well, to the point where I hardly notice them. Overall I am satisfied with the result, and I am grateful to the medical team for giving me such a good outcome.


Walking was a little uncomfortable at first, but after about 2 weeks there was no problem with daily life Up to the 1-month mark I thought there wasn't much change because of the swelling, but it kept going down and by month 3 my thighs are noticeably slimmer and the line is coming together~~ I even got a gap on my inner thighs hehe Now even slim-fit pants drape so much nicer on me so I'm very satisfied


I used to be really self-conscious about my upper arms and worried so much about my arm line whenever I got dressed But now after surgery, even if they aren't skinny arms, I have an arm line that suits my body and I'm satisfied I especially love that the bulky look of my arms in clothes is mostly gone! I have keloid-prone skin so I was worried the scars would turn raised, but for nothing - there's only a bit of pigmentation left and they look really clean Honestly the first month there was a lot of swelling and it hurt a lot, but from a month on it started getting much better Now at 6 months there's no pain at all even when I press on them, and it doesn't feel like I had surgery From the start the doctor and the consultation manager explained recovery so well that I didn't worry, and I trusted what they said The staff who handled my aftercare were so kind and took good care of me too Maybe because the surgery went safely, I had nothing to feel anxious about or unhappy with during recovery


It's been 6 months since my arm lipo with Dr. Joongjae Baek! These days my arms feel light and comfortable, like nothing ever happened The line is definitely slimmer too, and people around me often say I've lost a lot of weight hehe With my arm line refined, the biggest thing I notice is how differently clothes fit The scars are left like faint dots, and I'm just leaving them alone without any special care The bruising was all gone about a month after the procedure, and right now I barely feel any swelling either Overall the thickness has come down a lot so they feel much slimmer I lost weight at the same time so I got even more out of it But I don't think weight loss alone could have created this kind of refined line or straight arm look so I think having the procedure gave me a much more satisfying result I might gain weight again in the future, but it's nice knowing I won't have to worry about my upper arms!


Before surgery my weight itself was high and fat had built up especially on my upper arms, so they weren't just heavy, they were sagging too T_T With my wedding coming up and thinking I couldn't live like this forever, I decided on surgery, and I found out liposuction alone wouldn't be enough - I needed an arm lift as well. So while looking around, TheLINE Plastic Surgery had a lot of lift reviews and seemed to take safety seriously, so I went in for a consultation Compared to other clinics, Dr. Jaeho Cho answered every single question I had about arm lifts clearly and came across as very professional, so I booked a date right away! About scarring he told me it can't be avoided entirely, but that he would place it as neatly as possible on the inner arm, and that using stem cells together would help the scars heal faster As for my condition now after surgery, the scars are still visible! But when I think about the sagging skin that came off, it feels like nothing And I can see them shrinking over time as I keep up with the ointment, so I figure I just need to stay consistent with care As you can see from the before and after, it literally came right off, recovery was fast, and I love the new shape of my arms I still have scar care left and I need to lose a bit more weight, but going from arms that looked like sleeves to a straight line is a huge change in my life T_T Thank you so much, doctor, for making this happen T_T


First off, the scars I was most worried about became invisible even though I didn't do any scar-removal treatment or special care I was told I wouldn't see a dramatic effect since I'm the muscular type, but now I can wear slim tees as much as I want, and everyone who sees me asks how I got so small hehe I also get asked a lot whether I always had straight shoulders From the front it looks much more refined, so my clothing options have widened, and I've been told turtlenecks, the worst enemy of a straight body type, now suit me, which feels great I regret not doing it sooner and doing lipo in the middle of summer, but even if I went back I'd make the same choice! I feel less pressure about the scale than before, and instead of obsessing over dieting I now focus on getting firmer through exercise, so I'm very satisfied hehe It came out so natural that even my family still doesn't know I had lipo. They just think I dieted a lot, which shows how lipo is easier to manage and less demanding than other cosmetic surgery! Maybe not every clinic is like this, but I think all the legwork I put into finding a clinic with natural results and minimal scarring paid off If you're looking for a clinic with little scarring and fast recovery, I recommend TheLINE hehe


After surgery my arm line feels so much more refined that overall I am very satisfied. The outer and back lines of my arms are slimmer so clothes fit much better. I used to be self-conscious about my upper arms, but now they clearly look less bulky, which I love. The scars are still slightly red, but the bruising and swelling have improved a lot and I'm happy with the arm line itself.


It's been about a month since surgery, and I love how pretty the line is!!! Overall the recovery process was fairly easy. Early on I was careful not to overdo it, avoiding heavy lifting and anything that used my arms too much. Other than that I got through daily life without much discomfort, so it was far easier than I expected. The scars were also much less visible than I feared. Even right after surgery they didn't stand out badly, and once the sutures were removed they settled naturally into a thin line. The suturing was done meticulously so the overall impression was very clean. Even a non-expert could tell from the result alone that the surgery went well, and I'm hoping that with more time they'll be almost unnoticeable even without any special scar care.


I can't believe it's already been 3 months, so here's my review! Compared to before surgery I'm about -6kg now! I thought the swelling was almost gone after 1 month, but at month 3 I realized month 1 was still all swelling lol... They say you need 3 months for the line to show and I think that's really true, at month 3 the line definitely stands out more..!! I don't have little muscle so I wondered whether my front thighs could improve much, but the thing I'm happiest with now is the size of my front thighs T_T.. They shrank a lot front to back and that's what satisfies me most.. During the pre-op explanation I was told that if you only remove a lot of fat, the muscle underneath pops out more once the fat covering it is gone, so the effect can look minimal, and that the right amount has to be removed.. And the size came down exactly as much as I wanted, so I'm happy T_T Also it's not just removing fat, the way they create the line is so satisfying. When I put on pants it's really.. I love it T_T Compared to before surgery the line has improved so much that it amazes me And I'm glad I did the Chanel line as well. It would have looked odd if only my knees stuck out... I'm so satisfied!


Now it really feels like my own body, and there must have been some invisible residual swelling because it keeps going down as time passes I had abdominal and thigh liposuction along with hip fat grafting and I love every bit of it T_T Especially the abdomen!!! My belly fat left me with no waistline at all and body-hugging dresses were out of the question, but now that the belly fat is gone and I have a line, I look so good in a fitted dress T_T The scars are on my hip and tailbone so nothing shows even in a bikini, which I love Maybe because stem cells were used, recovery was fast even with so many areas treated, and there's absolutely no rippling or unevenness of the skin I get told my figure is pretty a lot, and nobody would ever guess I had surgery unless I said so, so I'm extremely satisfied!! If you don't want fat just taken out excessively and left lumpy, and you want a pretty line instead, I highly recommend TheLINE hehe


This is my 6-month review after inner and outer thigh liposuction and hip dip fat grafting at TheLINE! Before surgery my thighs touched and the line had collapsed, but now it's nicely refined. The heavy bruising and swelling lasted about a month I think, and from a month on moving around got much easier. My inner thighs are smooth now and the bulge on the outside is gone too, which I love.


The line has changed noticeably and after the second session the cleavage line looks much more natural! The only scars left are from the thigh lipo, and the ones on my chest are barely noticeable hehe Recovery was fast the first time and just as fast the second time. The bruising actually faded quicker after the second session! They shaped my breasts so nicely that I'm satisfied, and it feels like the surgery was done with real care, which I love! Looking back from before surgery through the second session, I really think I made the right choice, and if I maintain it well and get greedy later I'd even consider a third session! That's how satisfied I am!


I had the waist-to-saddlebags package (love handles, thigh liposuction, Chanel line, hip fat grafting) with Dr. Jaeho Cho! Since the line appeared overnight thanks to surgery, at first I thought I should take even better care of myself, but then I started trusting the surgery's effect (?) and got a bit lazy lately.. lol I'm on my feet all day so my legs swell, but the thing that really lets me slack off is that they never swell or gain weight like they used to! Even if I do put on a little weight, the proportions stay the same. Before surgery I was basically one straight block, but after surgery I got a waist and hip line, and even when I gain weight it just fills out evenly while the line stays.. Honestly that alone makes me so happy... And what I'm truly satisfied with is the saddlebags... Before surgery I had a lot of muscle there as well as fat I'd read many posts saying there's a limit to what lipo can do for the muscular type, so I told myself not to expect much, but after surgery the fat came right off and just enough muscle stayed for a pretty shape. Of course the size went down, and my body actually looks prettier and healthier!! There are so many more clothes I can wear now, which I love I think it's true that with lipo the effect shows more and more as time passes. Don't be impatient, everyone, just wait and the line will come hehe


It's been 3 months since my love handle liposuction and hip fat grafting with Dr. Joongjae Baek The treated areas are still holding up well and my line has changed, so I'm posting this review because I'm satisfied


It's been one month since my arm and accessory breast liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung!! People around me have started saying my line looks prettier and it feels so good hehe It also feels like the line is firming up, so I think I made the right call. The scars have faded noticeably so I can really feel how well I'm healing, and now that the bruising and heavy swelling are gone it's so comfortable. Right now I'm just waiting for the last bit of swelling to go down, and I'm already looking forward to the finished line. The whole recovery has gone smoothly so I think I've spent this month stress-free. There's still a bit of firmness so I'm massaging and taking care of it diligently!


At 3 months I think the effect has become clearly visible. I did two areas, my arms and the upper arm root, and I can definitely feel that clothes look different on me, so I'm really looking forward to this summer. The scars also seem much fainter than at first, which is nice. There's no bruising at all and the swelling seems almost completely gone. My arms don't ache anymore and sometimes I even forget I had surgery hehe Recovery was quick and the line keeps showing more over time, so I'm satisfied!


From week 3 I felt some biobond (hard lumps) in places, but thankfully it softened quickly and never got bad enough to disturb daily life. The swelling had gone down a lot, and raising my arms high, tying my hair and doing things that take strength were almost back to normal. That was the point where I felt glad I had the surgery here. On the day I hit week 3 I unavoidably had a drink, and the next day my arms felt a bit stiff. I think it's better to avoid alcohol if you can T_T The line matters, of course, but what satisfies me most is how fast the recovery has been. Once I add the extra aftercare I think I'll get an even better result in time for this summer, so I'm looking forward to it. Before surgery my arms never slimmed down no matter how much I dieted, so I'd lose motivation and end up failing, but now looking at my slimmer arms actually makes me more determined to diet. I've also started thinking I should keep my belly from sticking out, so overall I feel much more motivated. Summing up my overall review of liposuction on both upper arms and one accessory breast area, my satisfaction is very high because recovery and return to daily life were fast, and even before the aftercare the visible change is clear, so I feel it was a good choice. I'm looking forward to seeing how much more the line comes together as I go through the aftercare.


The swelling has gone down a lot now so I can clearly see my arm line is refined. I was told a total of 650cc of pure fat was removed, and I'm stretching every day and doing gua sha to help circulation. Posting before and after photos too~


It's already been 3 months since my arm lift + liposuction. I had gained up to 100kg and then lost about 40kg, but my arms still looked thick for my weight and the skin sagged, so I decided on a lift and had surgery after a consultation at TheLINE. What made me choose TheLINE was that it's stem cell surgery and that they have a lot of experience with lift procedures. I had surgery with Dr. Jaeho Cho, and I trusted him from the consultation onward. He checked my progress before and after surgery in detail, which put me at ease. I'm still being careful with myself, but my arms lift fine and I have no trouble being active. Sometimes the surgical site stings a little, but it keeps getting better so I'm not worried, and right now I can even do light exercise, so daily life is completely unaffected! I went in accepting the scars, so I'm applying scar ointment diligently and hoping they fade with time. I'm hoping they fade enough for me to wear sleeveless tops by summer hehe I never dared to wear sleeveless before, so I'm happy that this summer I might be able to. The early days after surgery were uncomfortable, but as time passed I can't even remember the discomfort and all I think is that I'm glad I did it. I agonized a lot before going through with it, but I think it would have been even better to do it sooner. Hold on just a little and the painful time passes quickly!!! If anyone is hesitating, I recommend doing it as soon as possible! And I recommend TheLINE Plastic Surgery even more! I'm extremely, extremely satisfied!!!


After surgery my line definitely feels much more refined. My arm line is slimmer overall, and I can clearly feel the fit around my upper arms is different when I get dressed, so my satisfaction is high. The scars did bother me at first, but they've faded a lot over time so now they hardly bother me at all! The bruising and swelling were worst in the first 1-2 weeks and then kept going down, and after more than a month it improved noticeably I think! Right now there's no swelling or bruising at all :) The overall recovery went more smoothly than I expected. If you just take care in the early stage, after that I think I healed without much trouble in daily life! I'm glad I had no side effects! Overall I'm satisfied with both the result and the recovery, and I plan to keep taking care of it and maintaining it!


It's been 6 months since my arm and accessory breast liposuction The bulging parts are gone so the overall line has improved. My scars were faint to begin with, but now they seem almost gone, so I have no worries about scarring and I'm satisfied.


It was a surgery where you could feel the doctor's philosophy of putting safety and a natural line first, rather than scraping out every bit of fat. Even though 600cc of pure fat was extracted, maybe because stem cells were used alongside, I'm recovering healthily without major issues like skin sagging or dents. I'm only at the one-month mark so there's still swelling and biobond, but seeing the line come together smoothly without unevenness puts me at ease. Rather than removing as much as possible like a factory-style clinic, they kept to a safe range suited to the patient's body, so it's a clinic I trust. I want to manage the remaining swelling well and end up with pretty arms~


One month after thigh liposuction and breast fat grafting! At one month my breasts have definitely softened! It's amazing to feel the slightly firm feeling turn soft... The satisfaction of feeling more feminine from the natural increase is big! Right now, maybe because the volume was placed on top, everything is completely soft except for a shaded part in the middle!!! I guess this is the biggest advantage of fat grafting, no scars and no foreign-body sensation The thigh liposuction seems to be settling in now! The scars weren't fading as well as I expected so I worried they'd stay, but at the one-month mark, meaning right now, I can see them fading day by day! At one month the bruising has faded a lot too ~~ so I think I can check the change in shape a bit more objectively now I hope it stays like this ~~!


I had surgery on my abdomen and love handles with Dr. Jaeho Cho. The biggest change I feel after surgery is that my abdominal line is clearly refined. The excess flesh came off overall so I got a waistline, and I can feel that clothes fit much more neatly. At first it felt a little firm and unfamiliar, but it loosened up naturally over time and now it's very natural. After about 6 months the scars have faded so much that I hardly notice them. The locations aren't very visible either, so there's no discomfort at all in daily life. The bruising and swelling were worst right after surgery, and the heavy swelling went down over about 2 to 3 weeks. Residual swelling lingered a little for over a month and then gradually settled, and now there's no swelling or bruising at all. The overall recovery was more bearable than I expected, and since there were visible changes as time passed, my satisfaction kept growing. In the end I'm very satisfied now, and I've gained a lot of confidence in my body line. Thank you!!


It's been a month since surgery!! There's no swelling or bruising at all, and since I dieted alongside after surgery my chest line is so satisfying and my body feels so much lighter ^^ I'm looking forward to how it looks another month from now Dr. Yoosuk Chung is the best!! And Sehee and the manager on the 5th floor were so kind, thank you ^^


After my first abdominal liposuction I wasn't satisfied because of sagging skin and asymmetry. But after the revision surgery the asymmetry gradually evened out and I was really satisfied to see my abdomen becoming flat. As the bruising and swelling went down, I could see the flesh settling just as the doctor had said, and I was truly satisfied. What worried me most was the sagging skin, but after surgery, when I bend forward, the sagging shows less than before, so I felt the revision liposuction was really the right choice. And maybe because stem cells were used for the liposuction, the pain was less severe than before and I could get back to daily life quickly!! Also, I live far away so coming back and forth to the clinic was difficult. But the clinic took my situation into account so I could do the aftercare all at once, which was another advantage!! I had questions during the aftercare and the staff answered them kindly, so I was really grateful. hehe


It's one month since my arm and accessory breast liposuction My arm line definitely looks smaller and the accessory breast tissue is gone Everyone around me says I look smaller, and my arms definitely aren't tight in clothes anymore The scars aren't visible unless I raise my arms wide open and the color is fading bit by bit I normally heal slowly so my stitched areas used to stay open even after suture removal, but this time they seemed closed even before the sutures came out The bruising lasted about 1-2 weeks and is completely gone now. At week 2 I was swollen back to about my pre-op size, but from around week 3 the swelling started coming down bit by bit. Like it goes down a little every day? There's no pain now either I think I'll get even slimmer once all the swelling is gone, so I'm looking forward to it


I had abdomen, bra line and love handle liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek! It's been 3 months now and I think the swelling has gone down a lot. My waistline is much more refined and my belly has come in a lot, so I'm very satisfied. If I eat too much it tries to come back like before surgery, so I'm keeping up with maintenance.


Three months have passed since my abdominal liposuction. The swelling is almost entirely gone now and my abdominal line feels stable overall. My lower belly and sides are refined so my abdomen looks flatter than before, and my body shape gives a slimmer impression. My weight hasn't changed much, but the way clothes fit is clearly different. In particular, the pressure around my abdomen when wearing pants has decreased, which I'm very happy about. There's no discomfort at all in daily life, and everything from light exercise to regular workouts is manageable. Some parts still feel slightly firm to the touch but there's no pain, and they are gradually softening over time. Sensation has largely returned as well. Overall I'm satisfied that instead of an excessively obvious change, I got a naturally refined abdominal line. It barely looks like I had surgery, yet compared to before there's a clear improvement. At this point I have no regrets about the surgery, and I expect it to get even better depending on how I maintain it.


It's already been 6 months since my surgery hehe I agonized over my upper arm fat for years, but now I'm living so naturally that I forget I even had surgery. I wouldn't call it a hugely dramatic change, but I definitely feel much slimmer than before. Especially when I hold my arms against my sides and look from the front, the biggest thing I notice is that the flesh that used to bulge out sideways is gone. Lately I keep saying I should diet but can't quite get my mind set on it, so I keep putting it off... Still, my upper arms are definitely slimmer than before, so even at the same weight it feels different! In photos I look a bit chubbier than in person, but seeing myself in the mirror I'm very satisfied And above all, what satisfies me most is the accessory breast area. Even at my lowest weight the accessory breast tissue stayed the same T_T (I guess you really are born with it...) Overall I think it turned out naturally and suited to my body, so I'm really satisfied! Now I'm going to add weight training and work on firming up a bit more


This is my 3-month review! The biggest change I felt after surgery is that my thigh line is refined overall. My thighs used to look bumpy in pants, but now I can see they're much smoother and slimmer. The circumference came down too so clothes fit differently, and I'm happier when I look in the mirror. The scars had a bit of redness at first, but they faded a lot over time and now they hardly bother me. Recovery also felt faster than I expected. The bruising and swelling went down a lot over about 2 to 3 weeks, and by around a month I had almost no discomfort in daily life. Right now there's barely any swelling and a natural line has settled in. Overall the recovery was easier than I feared, and it feels like things settle more naturally as time passes, so I'm satisfied. They guided me well on aftercare too, so I could recover with peace of mind. Thank you ~!


I'm at the 6-month mark. The swelling feels completely gone, and it feels natural to the touch with no odd sensation. I lost a bit of weight in the meantime and I can definitely feel my arm and accessory breast line is even more refined, so overall I have a much slimmer, cleaner silhouette. In particular the straight drop of my shoulder line has come back, which I'm really happy about. I did it while preparing for my wedding, and at the dress fitting I really felt glad I had. With my arms and upper body refined, the dress fit so much prettier. I have my wedding shoot coming up soon so I'm looking forward to it even more, and overall I'm very satisfied with where I am now


It's already been 6 months since surgery and my arm line feels completely settled. I could feel the change even at the 1-month mark, but over time it's become slimmer and smoother overall. Especially seen from the side, my arm line falls naturally, so my satisfaction has grown even more. There was some bruising and swelling early on but it wasn't as bad as I expected, and most of it went down over about 2 to 3 weeks I think. By around a month I had almost no discomfort in daily life. Now there's barely any swelling or firmness and it has settled in naturally. The scars looked like small dots at first, but they've faded a lot over time so now you can barely tell unless you look up close. The recovery process went without much trouble overall, so personally I think I healed more comfortably than I expected. With my arm line refined, the change I feel most is how differently clothes fit. I have much more confidence than before, especially in sleeveless or slim tops. Overall I feel they brought out both the line and the firmness naturally, so I'm satisfied with the result.


The first thing I noticed after surgery is that my arm line got really clean! Before, the flesh would press together when my arms were at my sides, but now it falls much more slimly so I feel good every time I get dressed hehe It feels like the size dropped a lot too. The scars were slightly red at first so I worried, but they've faded a lot over time. Now they're barely noticeable so I don't pay much attention to them. The bruising and swelling were worst for about 1 to 2 weeks, and after that they went down faster and faster. By around a month daily life was completely comfortable, and now there's hardly any swelling. Overall the recovery was better than I expected, and seeing the result makes me wish I'd done it sooner ^^!


It's been about 3 months since I had an arm lift and arm lipo together, so I'm leaving a review! It's not fully settled yet, and the clinic said to keep watching for up to 6 months. There's still a lot of swelling. Even so, I can definitely feel my arm circumference has come down hehe I had a jacket that used to be tight because of my arms and now it fits comfortably, so that part I really notice. The scars are in a spot that's barely visible when I stand with my arms down, so they don't bother me much in daily life! I wasn't very sensitive about scars to begin with, so I think I'm fine. Early after surgery I did have an inflammation once and had a bit of a hard time, but it healed completely and I'm fine now. These days I've been going swimming a bit, and I'm not 100% back to how I was, but in swimming terms it feels like about 80% is possible hehe Overall, once the early stage passed, recovery was better than I expected and now I have almost no problems in daily life! They said the line can still change, so I'm going to watch how it comes together over the remaining time.


Now that it's been over half a year I think I'm living without a single inconvenience! Up until two months ago there was some discomfort when stretching or raising my arms, but now I stretch comfortably and there's no pain at all! It feels like time solves everything, so I've been relaxed about it and now they feel like my own arms with no strange sensation hehe What I'm most satisfied with is picking clothes. I used to only buy loose-sleeved things, but now I can buy fitted ones too if they're pretty, and that's the best part! The fit is much nicer too :) As for the scars, I was busy so I couldn't apply the ointment consistently, but even patchy as it was they faded a lot, so I'm satisfied! I'm going to save up money and get other areas done soon. If you're hesitating, I absolutely recommend it !_!


I was worried because I have a fair amount of muscle in my upper arms, but I'm very satisfied with the surgery. I'm especially happy about how clothes look, and everyone around me says I've lost weight. I only had my arms done but I look slimmer overall, which I love hehe


I had abdominal lipo with Chief Director Dr. Jaeho Cho There's no bruising at all and it feels like the swelling has gone down a lot Maybe about 20 percent of the residual soreness is left If I wear tight pants around my abdomen there's a tingling kind of pain around it? Overall a lot of belly fat is gone so I'm satisfied, and it feels like the swelling has come down a lot, but I was told the invisible swelling will keep going down so I'm looking forward to it even more


It's already been a whole month since my upper arm lift. At first the recovery felt long, but now when I lower my arms the flesh that used to spread sideways is gone and the line drops straight down, so I feel proud every time I look in the mirror. Seeing that clothes aren't tight around my upper arms anymore and there's room to spare, I really feel the change. The scars I worried about most still have some redness since it's only been a month, but the color has faded a lot from the start, so I feel like recovery is faster than I expected. The bruising was almost entirely gone about 2 weeks after surgery, and the heavy swelling has settled a lot too, so I have no discomfort at all in daily life. Early on my arm movements were a little awkward and stiff, but as time passed sensation came back and movement became natural, so I think the overall recovery has been very smooth. The line seems to look prettier every day so I'm looking forward to how it turns out!


Hello. It's been 3 months since my surgery so I'm leaving a review. I had hip fat grafting. The swelling and bruising I had at first mostly went away naturally over about a month, and now everything is completely stable. Over time the line has settled in more softly and naturally, so now it barely looks like I had surgery. My overall silhouette feels naturally refined, so my satisfaction is high. Both the donor site and the grafted area healed well without any particular discomfort. The scars were slightly visible at first but faded a lot over time, so now they don't stand out much. I also felt the recovery was faster than I expected. The pain and discomfort after surgery weren't severe either, and getting back to daily life was relatively easy. Right now I have no trouble at all with exercise or everyday activities. The result feels like it settles more naturally as time passes, so overall I'm very satisfied ^^


It's been 3 months since my arm liposuction at TheLINE Plastic Surgery! I have gained a bit of weight back though.. Still, it doesn't feel like going back to my pre-op state, more like being puffy? so I think it'll come off soon hehe The scars are still visible but clothes cover them so I didn't even pay attention, and checking after a while they've faded a lot The bruising and swelling are completely gone now The surgery matters, but I think the result also clearly depends on how you handle your diet! So I'm starting my diet again from now and it'll get even better ^^


It's already been 9 months since I had arm lipo, accessory breast removal and an armpit lift with Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE Plastic Surgery. Early on the scars stood out and I wondered when they would go away, but now they've improved a lot. The scars blend in with the line of the armpit area so you have to look closely to notice. Movement is natural with no discomfort, nothing hurt during recovery, and there isn't a single bruise to be found hehe Compared to before, it really feels like... an enormous change hehe If I keep taking care of it and putting in the effort like this I think I can get even better results. Thank you.


I'm 3 months out from saddlebag liposuction The swelling is almost gone now and I think this is the final result The thigh fat that used to stick out sideways is much more refined, so I'm satisfied


I'm one month post-op. Dr. Yoosuk Chung did facial liposuction on my cheeks and jawline along with buccal fat removal. On the liposuction side the swelling gathered below the jawline, and until week 3 the area felt numb so shaving was a little awkward, but since then the sensation has been coming back. There are still some firm spots but they are loosening bit by bit. The buccal fat removal was done through an incision inside the mouth, so the scar is completely invisible. Since it's the face, I hesitated because I was worried about scarring, and the fact that no scar shows was one reason I chose TheLINE. Maybe because it was a stem cell procedure, the bruising cleared up noticeably fast and the overall recovery seems quick too. Most of all, the cheek fat that bothered me the most is gone and my facial contour is much more defined, so I feel like even my impression is improving. I'm satisfied.


It's been 3 months since surgery :) The contour is definitely cleaner, and the armpit area especially is much tidier! The scars have faded a lot overall and some parts have disappeared completely, so I'm very happy with how fast I'm recovering. The scars are still reddish overall, but parts of them are turning white as they heal. I have keloid-prone skin so I was worried, but I applied the clinic's ointment very diligently and everything settled down with no raised scars, which makes me so happy~ I don't feel any major swelling, just a little minor swelling left I think. My friends saw it and said my arms look really pretty ^^ I'm very satisfied myself too!


One month after abdomen and love handles. I feel the swelling going down more each day. My waistline in particular is slimmer, which makes me happy. Of course there's still some firmness, but I massage it out whenever that happens. My lat area still feels a bit stiff. Only a tiny bit of bruising is left and the scars are gradually fading too. I apply ointment every day and take care of them. I'll keep up the care until the day all the swelling is finally gone.


It's now one month since Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my breast surgery. After the surgery the shape settled in naturally, so getting dressed has become fun. The scars are still a bit visible but have faded a lot, and the bruising and swelling are almost entirely gone, so even the discomfort when I move has disappeared! I can see the recovery picking up speed, so I'm really looking forward to how much more natural it will settle!" The recovery process seems to be speeding up, and even though it already looks natural, I'm looking forward to the day it feels completely like my own.


I had surgery on February 3, so it's been one month now. I had 360° arm, accessory breast tissue and upper arm root liposuction plus an arm lift. I'm completely satisfied with the result haha. There's no more sagging flab on my upper arms, so nothing bulges out at the back when I wear clothes - I love it. And I really feel the difference when I get dressed! The scars are still fairly noticeable for now. There are still some scabs in places too. But they are settling down a lot as time passes. It's only one month, so I'm going to wait patiently. The bruising disappeared completely from about week 3. The swelling is going down gradually, and at one month there's a little pain when I press the surgical area, like touching a bruise, plus a lumpy feeling that's still there. Also, from suture removal until a bit past weeks 2 to 3, the surgical area was sensitive, so it stung and sometimes felt warm. At one month almost none of that is left and I'm recovering well.


Dr. Joongjae Baek did my accessory breast tissue and 360° arm lipo~! It's been about a month and there's almost no pain! The bruising went away within 1-2 weeks, and luckily it was winter so wearing the compression garment was comfortable. Comparing before and after, it's amazing how the accessory breast tissue is completely gone, and the scars are still visible so I'm treating them with ointment. My arm contour got a lot slimmer too, and I'm waiting for the swelling to go down so they get even slimmer. Also, in reviews from other clinics a lot of people said you can't raise your arms for a month, but thanks to the stem cells I had no pain and such a good course that I could lift my arms the very next day. The post-op pain did last longer than I expected, but not enough to keep me lying down. I hope I reach the 6-month mark soon so all the swelling is gone!


My weight went up sharply recently, so I decided on surgery because I wanted to clean up my body contour and diet at the same time. I went around to several other well-known places for consultations, but at many of them only the managers consulted with me without a doctor and then pushed or pressured me into signing. Here, though, the doctor and the manager came in together and looked at my body directly while going through the surgical consultation. The aftercare program is on the shorter side so I hesitated, but the doctor was very confident about the result and told me that a well-done surgery recovers quickly even with short aftercare, so I decided on this clinic. There really is a reason the doctor is that confident. The incisions were minimal and I barely bruised at all. I'm one month post-op, the bruising is completely gone and recovery is really fast. The contour is definitely cleaner too. It's only been a month so there's still swelling, and I'm going to work hard on swelling care and my diet! If you want safe, fast recovery and a cleaner contour, I recommend it!!


A month has passed and I even went to the pool. I used to pick rash guards with designs that hid my upper arms, but now I can wear anything and I love it! With slimmer arms my shoulders look narrower too, and people keep telling me I look more delicate and asking if I lost weight. The scars have faded a lot compared to before but I think I should get some treatment for them, and even though I never used bruise cream the bruising is completely gone~~ Now it doesn't hurt even if I press hard, and daily life is not affected at all.


Dr. Joongjae Baek did liposuction on my whole thighs and knees~ Around months 1-2 I most noticeably felt my saddlebags and the back of my thighs get tidier, and my legs went from feeling heavy overall to looking like normal-weight legs. Right now the scars have faded a lot, and although at first I could feel the wound sites sticking out when I touched them, now the surface feels smooth like normal skin. That said, the scars are still red, so I keep taking care of them. The bruising and swelling all disappeared once I passed the 2-month mark, and now there's no bruising at all and hardly any swelling~ Still, they said it keeps going down until the 6-month mark, so I'm looking forward to it ^^


It's already 3 months since surgery! Up until the one-month mark there was a bit of discomfort, but from month 2 on it feels so normal that I forget I had surgery. The swelling has clearly gone down compared to one month, and I used to avoid long-sleeve shirts because of my saggy upper arms, but these days I wear fitted shirts more often! They explained that scars puff up around this period, so I'll keep applying ointment and taking care of them! The suturing was so neat that I'm happy with the scars too hehehe At the two-month mark I started exercising a little, and I'll diet slowly to keep my contour!


It's 3 months since my thigh lipo and hip grafting! I recovered so well that it felt like half a year had passed, and it's only 3 months...! TheLINE is the best for recovery!! The minor swelling seems almost all gone, and my legs keep getting slimmer hehehe No dents or uneven contours at all - everything came out smooth, so I really think the surgery went well ㅜ♥ㅜ I'm terribly lazy ha ha;; and even though I personally didn't do much aftercare, seeing how satisfied I am with the contour, it was only possible because Dr. Joongjae Baek did an amazing job♥♥ Every time I look in the mirror there's a thigh gap and I'm so happy ㅠㅠ Thank you to the doctor for taking my muscles and body line into account and slimming me down as safely and beautifully as possible...!!


I had the second grafting 8 weeks after the first one, so it's 3 months from the first and 5 weeks from the second. With breast fat grafting, doing it over two rounds definitely gives more volume. After the second round the volume seems to hold well even after the swelling goes down. Before surgery I was barely an A cup and now I think I'm about a B cup. If it holds up to the end I'll be really satisfied.


Dr. Yoongeun Kim did my thigh and knee liposuction and hip fat grafting. It's been 6 months now and the overall shape of my legs settled nicely after surgery. Wearing shorts especially looks better, so I feel more confident. The scars are still visible but definitely less than at the start. The recovery also felt fast, like it was basically complete before the 3-month mark. Summer is coming so I'm dieting, and dieting with my legs already changed makes it far more satisfying.


I had arm liposuction on August 14 and I'm at the 6-month mark! I feel like I'm close to the final result now. A lot of the swelling has gone down so the overall contour looks clean, and the biggest thing I notice is how much neater my silhouette looks in clothes. The scars are few and small, so they don't stand out much. The redness has faded a lot too, so you'd hardly notice unless you look closely. The bruising and swelling are already gone, and most of the firm spots have softened. Daily life isn't affected at all and my body feels completely comfortable.


It's been a month since liposuction on my whole upper arms, abdomen, and inner and outer thighs. Dr. Joongjae Baek did it. First of all, the bruising was almost completely gone by around week 3 with no pigmentation. The bruising on my thighs was dark at first so I was worried, but it turned yellow and faded and ended up clearing up neatly, which was a relief. That said, there's still some tightness. It feels slightly firm when I touch it, and there's a pulling sensation when I move, so I can tell I'm still recovering. Even so, it doesn't affect daily life at all. It's only one month so there's still swelling, but the overall contour is definitely cleaner. They say the swelling makes you slimmer as you pass the two- and three-month marks, so I'll wait patiently. Even at this stage I'm satisfied with the contour itself, and seeing my stubborn upper arm fat, inner thighs and saddlebags tidied up makes me really glad I did it. I'm looking forward to how the contour settles once the remaining swelling and the bonding loosen up, and I'll keep taking good care of it.


Now that a month has passed there's almost no pain, just a slight pulling sensation around my navel and lower belly, and my lower belly still feels quite firm. The scars are still about the length of a thumbnail and still healing. The bruising is all gone, so apart from the surgical scars there's barely any trace of the surgery. My weight is about 1 kg less than before surgery, and since my lower belly used to stick out a lot, I really feel the difference there. It's only one month so there's still swelling, and I hope the swelling on my sides goes down soon~!


Dr. Jaeho Cho did my arm liposuction! There's a slightly odd sensation when I touch the surgical area, but no pain or anything else unusual~ I'm still wearing the compression garment every night when I sleep and during the day as well. The contour is cleaner overall and I think there's still some swelling. They said the swelling keeps going down until the 6-month mark, so I'm waiting for the final result~


There's no pain at all now, but sometimes when I raise my arm high to grab something the sutured part near my armpit pulls a little, and when I lie down with my arm under me there's an overall pulling feeling. Apart from those positions I feel like I'm back to normal life. Bruising, swelling and scars are probably what people worry about most after surgery, but I'm not the type who bruises easily, so I had some light bruises but nothing dramatic! The swelling is heavy at first...really ㅠㅠ This was my first surgery so I have no basis to say "it swells a lot" or "a little" compared to other surgeries, but I could definitely tell I was very swollen. Walking around often and drinking teas that are good for swelling helped quite a bit! Since it's a lift, I don't think it's possible to have no scar at all. They also told me scars are a matter of time, so I'm hoping they fade! Still, the sagging skin on my arms has improved so much that I'm happy!! It feels like it was done to fit my body exactly, and I'm dieting alongside now, so I think a bit more will come off~


I'm 6 months out from arm lipo. I had it done at another clinic before, so this was a revision. I had the surgery because I disliked how thick my arms looked overall. At the consultation they told me I had more muscle than expected so it wouldn't shrink as dramatically as I hoped, but since I also lost weight after surgery, it definitely looks smoother and tidier than before. My side profile in particular is cleaner and I'm satisfied.


You can see quite clearly with the naked eye that I've slimmed down. My navel is getting bigger and bigger! In terms of weight I'm down about 4 kg total since the lipo. But the way clothes fit has changed and a lot of the extra flab is gone. Especially after fasted cardio in the morning, looking in the mirror is so rewarding. The swelling should all be gone by now, so I'm going to combine diet and exercise to build an even better body.


Lift surgery, which I looked into because repeated dieting left my skin saggy and nothing fit me!! It got worse after two childbirths so I quickly booked a consultation, and since Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE has extensive lift experience and I read that stem cells can help with scar recovery, I decided on surgery right away! On the day of surgery the operating room staff took such good care of me that I got home safely and started recovering quickly ~ Right now there's almost no swelling and occasionally a mild tingling, but nothing that bothers me at all. With the flab off my arms I look less bulky, which is great, and my clothing choices have changed too, so I'm very satisfied!! I want to diet hard on the other areas too and wear lots of pretty clothes ^^ I highly recommend lift surgery to anyone worried about sagging arms .. and I'll write another review next time.!


Right after surgery I was so swollen and bruised that I worried it wouldn't work, but at week 3 the bruising and swelling started dropping fast and it keeps going down day by day :) My arms weren't that thick to begin with so the volume removed wasn't large, but I can clearly see they're slimmer than before! Most of all, I can see the fit is different when I wear tight long sleeves or a cardigan, and I'm looking forward to summer...hehe I still can't raise my arms all the way up, and the scar area is a little uncomfortable I heard it gets better with time so I'll wait~ Some bonding is forming, so I've had one manual care session at a shop and one aftercare session at the clinic I'm getting the last remaining session next week! There's no pain unless someone hits my arm I'll post another review around the 3-month mark when more of the swelling is gone~!!


Now that it's been a month since surgery, you can clearly see my arm contour is tidier than before! The thickness is reduced especially when seen from behind, so I really notice it in short sleeves Even with my arms at my sides they stick out less than before, so I'm satisfied There's still swelling and I'm hoping more comes off~ It started going down from week 3, and at one month now the major swelling seems mostly resolved There are two scars near my armpits, and at one month they're still reddish, so I apply ointment to help them heal The bruising was almost entirely gone between weeks 2 and 3 and now it isn't visible Sometimes I feel a bit of minor swelling but it doesn't get in the way of daily life The overall recovery went more smoothly than I expected, and the best part was that daily life was barely affected The pain also stopped bothering me much after the first few days I can't wait for all the swelling to go so I can see the final contour


It's been about a month since my surgery at TheLINE, and I can definitely see my arm contour is much tidier, which is amazing Especially from the side and around the back of my triceps it's slimmer, so my arms look much thinner and longer. Before, when I raised my arm the flesh would spread out, but now it looks much firmer and smoother, and I'm satisfied. There was swelling early on so I worried a bit, but as the swelling went down I could feel the contour getting clearer. The change in how my clothes fit is what I notice most! The scars aren't completely invisible yet, but they've faded much more than I expected and keep getting lighter, so they don't bother me much. It's only one month, after all hehe I also felt the recovery was faster than I had feared. The bruising was almost entirely gone after about 2-3 weeks, and now I'm going about daily life with no discomfort at all. Seeing this much change at just one month makes me very happy, and I'm looking forward to further changes as more swelling goes down Overall I'm satisfied with both the result and the process, and I think it was a good decision!


Dr. Yoongeun Kim did my abdomen and corset liposuction. The front of my abdomen and my sides slimmed down noticeably and the contour came back. People around me even ask how I got so slim! I'm very satisfied (I didn't exercise at all) The scars seem to be fading very gradually but they're still visible. They don't bother me much but I think I need to keep an eye on them. As for recovery speed, right now I feel so completely normal that I think I forgot about it after about a month and a half! They said it was a stem cell surgery, so I guess that's why recovery is fast. If you're on the fence, I just recommend it without reservation! It's not simply a matter of dieting - your body contour changes!


It's already been 3 months since I had liposuction on my abdomen and arms. I'm leaving an honest review in case it helps anyone who, like me, is thinking about surgery! Right after surgery there was swelling and discomfort, but the saying that time heals turned out to be exactly right. At 3 months I'm amazed every day at how different my contour looks. My abdomen especially is flat, and with the extra flesh on my upper arms tidied up, the way clothes look on me has really changed. I can finally wear all the pretty clothes I want! Of course consistent aftercare and healthy habits matter, but I feel like I'm already halfway there. I'm happy every time I look in the mirror, and my confidence is overflowing. I agonized a lot before deciding on surgery, but now I'm certain it was a decision I don't regret at all. I hope my experience gives a little courage to everyone dreaming of a change!


I'm a woman in my late 20s, 6 months after abdomen + love handle liposuction at TheLINE Plastic Surgery These days I catch myself walking around confidently in anything I wear, so I even bought a new full-length mirror ^^ Huge thanks to Dr. Yoongeun Kim for turning a chubby person who only wore size L into a size M The scars bothered me at first, but now I never have occasion to show them, and even when I wash up I have to look for them to see them haha Bruising and swelling differ from person to person, but I'm the type whose bruises fade easily so mine were all gone in a week!!! Overall, rather than staying still because it hurts, I think walking and moving constantly makes recovery faster too


I can't believe it's already been a month! The first week was honestly a bit tough, but seeing the major swelling settle down reassured me bit by bit as I watched the progress! Most of all, the bulge on the side of my arms that stood out so much in earlier photos has visibly shrunk, so I'm satisfied! These days I'm looking forward to seeing more swelling go down hehe


Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE did my abdominal lipo + hip dip grafting! It's been 3 months since surgery and my hip line definitely came alive, and I gain less weight relative to what I eat! The scars keep fading and my body feels lighter. The recovery period was surprisingly short! I was surprised at how quickly I recovered! My hips have more volume than before and my jeans fit differently!


It's been three months now and unless I consciously think about having had surgery, I'm comfortable enough that daily life isn't affected~ After the liposuction my contour definitely looks prettier and I'm satisfied~ ! The surgical scars are barely visible, and at first they looked a bit dark so I was worried, but with time they're hardly noticeable. The bruising was severe for about 2-3 weeks and then faded quickly ! Recovery itself does seem fast I'm debating whether to do my lower body too, and if it's only as hard as the arms were, I should think about it when I have time hehe


The overall silhouette running from my back flanks (love handles) down to my buttocks, which worried me most before surgery, has definitely changed!! Mine was a revision on the abdomen, love handles and thighs, and I had hip dip fat grafting at the same time From about 3 months after surgery there was no swelling and I liked it best, and now at about 6 months, since I haven't been watching my diet or exercising I've gained a little, but even so the contour doesn't seem to collapse, so I'm very satisfied! The bruising is nowhere to be found now, and the incision sites are still there but have faded a lot!! Since I had the surgery in my 40s I was worried about skin elasticity and scarring, but recovery was faster than expected and my skin isn't crinkled or sagging, so I'm relieved and satisfied♥ It feels like a place where you can become prettier safely and quickly, so it's a clinic I'd recommend!!


Posting my review of abdomen and flank liposuction. I'm at 3 months now, and I can clearly feel the overall volume of my abdomen has decreased, and I'm especially satisfied with how smoothly the love handle line on my sides has been tidied up. The front of my abdomen changes a bit more slowly, but I see it as a process of settling in, so I'm staying positive. I don't bleed much by nature, so the bruising all cleared up quickly within a month. The major swelling settled early too, and now that the minor swelling is resolving, my body feels much lighter. I'm watching the scars without rushing, and I can see them fading more as time passes. The recovery pace isn't bad, so I think they'll look much more natural with more time. The whole recovery process went smoothly and daily life wasn't much affected. Now that I'm into the third month I can see the contour clearly coming through, so overall I'm very satisfied.


It's already been 6 months since Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my arm liposuction + lift The red lift scars started fading from the inner armpit and parts of them are starting to turn white hehe So amazing!! For a while the red surgical marks were so vivid that I wondered whether I could wear short sleeves the very next summer, but while I spent the whole winter in long sleeves I forgot about them, and the scars faded a lot and the color lightened so it looks totally! possible!! It's only been 6 months, and the way my old tops and dresses fit has changed... it amazes me every time I see it hehe My goal this summer is to diet hard and try wearing a tank top!!


Dr. Joongjae Baek did my love handle and saddlebag lipo + buttock fat grafting I had surgery on January 2 so I'm exactly one month out The scar is a single stitch in the crease between my buttocks, so it's in a spot no one sees and it doesn't bother me. The bruising was on the grafted area but it was gone in 2 weeks First of all, I love the contour of my love handles With the buttock fat grafting, the volume looks less than right after surgery as the swelling went down, which is a little disappointing, but that was just swelling.. Still, compared to before surgery the contour is definitely better. I hope what has taken now stays put~


I bruised quite a lot, but it's all gone now! Time really is the cure and I worried for nothing haha It doesn't look unnatural at all - it came out naturally and nicely, so I'm very satisfied. TheLINE has fewer scars than other places, and the fact that you don't have to do disinfecting and bandaging after surgery is such a huge advantage!!! That stuff is a hassle... The scars are still visible, but they're in a spot that doesn't show unless I raise my arms, so it's only me who notices haha! I think they'll fade more with time, so I'm not too worried Right now there's a slight tingling when I touch it, but it keeps decreasing so I think that will be fine too Overall I'm satisfied with the result, and if you're worried about your upper arm contour I think it's well worth considering ????


One month after hip dip grafting. They took fat from my thighs and grafted it into my hip dips. There's still swelling, but the contour seems to be improving little by little. At one month the scars are almost gone. Recovery seems fast. So contrary to my worries, that's one less thing to stress about. And the thing I was worried about was skin elasticity, but there's no sagging and it's just as good hehe


It's already been a month since Dr. Jaeho Cho did my abdomen and love handle liposuction, so I'm summing up the changes and the recovery process. I had a lot of fat on my abdomen, and the doctor told me my skin could sag if too much were removed, so I didn't expect much. But even though it's only one month, I can clearly feel the contour is neatly tidied up when I wear clothes, so I'm satisfied. The scars are in the process of fading over time, but they're still visible, so I think I'll need to keep applying ointment and caring for them. Luckily the scars themselves aren't large, so I'm reassured that with more time they'll heal enough not to bother me. The bruising was almost entirely gone about 2 weeks after surgery, and now I'm at the stage of focusing on swelling care rather than bruising. At my aftercare visit they said there's still swelling, so I'm even more excited to see how it looks once the swelling is fully gone. There's still a bit of the bio-bond effect where the areas the fat was removed from feel slightly lumpy. Looking back at the overall recovery, apart from the first 3 days or so after surgery there was almost no pain, so daily life wasn't a problem. That said, wearing the compression garment was quite stuffy and uncomfortable for the first week, which was a bit hard. But from week 2 it became noticeably more comfortable to wear, and now I feel no discomfort at all in daily life. I'm dieting alongside, so I can't wait to see the swelling fully gone and the contour completely settled.


It's already been 6 months since Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my arm lift and lipo. Compared to when I left my 3-month review, the contour feels far more refined and smoothly settled. What satisfies me most is the firmness of my arms - as time goes on, thanks to the lift the skin hugs the arm so the contour looks really natural. The inner arm skin doesn't sag or wobble like before, so I feel at ease every time I move my arms. The scars have also faded much more than at 3 months. The color is so light now that you wouldn't notice unless you look carefully, so I can feel the healing going well. The bruising and swelling were gone long ago, and the firm areas have all loosened, so my skin feels very soft now. Looking back at the whole recovery, it's amazing how it naturally comes together over time, just as the doctor said. Thanks to that, these days I wear clothes that suit my figure comfortably without worrying about my arms. I'm truly grateful that the change was exactly what I wanted, nothing excessive.


It's been a month since my arm lift + liposuction. I had gained up to 100 kg and then lost about 40 kg, but my arms looked thick for my weight and the skin sagged, so I decided on a lift, had a consultation at TheLINE, and went ahead with surgery. I consulted with Dr. Jaeho Cho and had the surgery with him. He only told me what was necessary without pushing extra procedures, which built trust, and since TheLINE was the only place doing stem cell surgery, I decided on TheLINE. The first week did hurt, but it was bearable, so I thought, oh, this hurts less than I expected? More than the pain, my hands swelled so much that the swelling was the hard part, but from week 2 the swelling started going down, and after the sutures came out at 2 weeks daily life got easier and easier. At one month the scars are clearly visible, but I went into the surgery accepting the scars, so I'm applying ointment and taking care of them, hoping they fade! I'm still being careful, and there's a little pain left plus some liposuction muscle soreness, but daily life is not a problem at all! Even at one month my arm size and contour are completely different, and I love it! When I put on cardigans or knits I used to wear I think, huh? were these clothes always this loose? and it makes me happy! Also, since my arm contour changed I got ambitious and watched my diet for a month, so I'm slowly losing weight too. I'm taking care of the scars and looking forward to the day the swelling is completely gone at two and three months~! If anyone is on the fence, I'd recommend doing it as soon as possible!


Friends I hadn't seen in a while all told me I'd lost a lot of weight and looked prettier, so I can feel the change myself. Every time I hear that I've had a better vibe since moving to Seoul, I think I made the right choice with the surgery. Most of all, I started feeling that I never want to go back to how I was, so controlling my appetite came naturally. The bruising and swelling healed without any particular trouble, and from about a month on it felt completely like my own skin again. Recovery was fast and I'm very satisfied with the result.


Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE did my abdomen and love handle lipo! It's been 6 months now and the contour has settled in really naturally. The swelling and bruising didn't last long and I got back to daily life quickly. The way clothes fit changed dramatically so I feel confident, and the aftercare was easier than I expected, so I'm very satisfied. It's the year-end and new year season so I've had lots of drinks and gatherings and couldn't diet, I just ate, but I didn't gain much and the contour stayed the same! I love it!


Dr. Jaeho Cho did liposuction on my inner and outer thighs After the surgery my saddlebags are gone so the contour falls nicely I bruised a lot and swelled a lot too, but now I can't really tell whether there's still swelling They said it keeps going down until the 6-month mark, so I think it's almost all gone by now The contour that used to be uneven because of the fat is definitely tidier and I'm satisfied


As the swelling went down and I could see my arm contour getting tidier, I now clearly feel that my arms are slimmer overall. My coworkers don't know I had surgery, so they tell me my arms have gotten a lot slimmer lately. The contour isn't excessive - it looks naturally tidied up, so I'm satisfied. The surgical scars in my armpits keep fading as I heal. Right now you can barely see them unless you look closely. There was bruising and swelling early on, but it wasn't as bad as for other people and I recovered relatively quickly. Right now daily life isn't affected at all. I'm so glad I got it done in advance.


After surgery my arm contour is definitely tidier There's more room in the sleeves of my clothes, and nothing bulges out even in tight tops My friends notice the change too, saying only my arms got slim, that my arms are really thin As for scars, I didn't do any care at all early on so they showed a bit, but I found a scar ointment for the summer and they're gradually fading They haven't disappeared completely yet, but I can see them healing The bruising was all gone after about 3 weeks, and now only minor swelling is left The major swelling lasted about 2 months, and now I can feel just a slight bit when I touch it I went back to work right after surgery and I use my arms a lot in my job, but it was no problem, and my family and coworkers have no idea I had surgery hehe The first week or so was rough, but overall recovery was smooth and I'm very satisfied!


It's been a month since Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my arm liposuction and I had the 360° version! A lot of the swelling has gone down, but it still hurts a bit when I knead it haha I stretch a little and I've had 2 post-op aftercare sessions. I think they helped..? I feel pain easily and my wounds tend to linger, but with intensive home care the scars are gradually disappearing Other than that, the swelling and bruising are all gone, and lately I'm doing so well in daily life that I've even started exercising again ^^ I only looked into liposuction three days before the surgery, so I had tons of worries and questions right up to the day, and Coordinator Sunyoung Baek responded to my inquiries so kindly and carefully that it helped with my aftercare too! Thank you, coordinator ^^ The timing was good too - you have to wear a compression garment and keep the wounds free of moisture, so I'm glad I did it in winter hehe It's only one month and I can already feel a lot of the contour coming off, and they say more swelling will go down, so I'm excited to see how much more comes off~


I was pretty much back to normal in a month... my recovery was so quick that I almost doubted I had actually had lipo, and the swelling seems to be almost all gone too. Every time I look in the mirror I have this slim waistline and I am so happy about it. My pants and skirts are loose at the waist now, and everyone I meet asks how I lost so much weight... it went in so much that people actually notice, so I really think surgery was the right call...♥ And there is absolutely no hardening of the skin either!!! Doctor, you are the best!!


It has been one month since my lift surgery on the side of my chest and armpit area! I had it together with liposuction on the bra line and under the armpit. It has only been a month, but the biggest change I feel after surgery is that my overall contour looks much cleaner and more natural. Even when there is swelling, it does not look bumpy like before, and I can feel that the contour is holding. It keeps looking more natural as time goes by, so my satisfaction goes up every time I look in the mirror. The scars were less noticeable than I expected and I felt recovery was on the fast side. They hid the scars so well that they have faded to the point where you hardly see them unless you look closely. The bruising and swelling went down gradually as long as I followed the aftercare instructions. The major swelling settled down a lot after about 1 to 2 weeks, and once it went down the contour showed better and there is almost no inconvenience in daily life. They took such good care of me that I recovered faster than I expected, and whenever I felt anxious they explained things clearly, which put me at ease. Overall I am satisfied with both the recovery and the surgical result! It has only been a month so some swelling is left, but watching it go down bit by bit, I am really looking forward to the fully settled result.


I had facial liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung! I always worried about having a lot of fat on my face, but it is so much slimmer than before I was worried that facial liposuction might make my skin sag, but it was done with the Power V method so there is no sagging at all, and my skin seems to have settled right onto the bone (?) so it even looks lifted, plus my double chin is gone. I am so satisfied. I am so glad I did it!


This is my one-month review of thigh liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. First of all, I still have a bit of bruising left. Considering the bruising, I would definitely recommend doing it in autumn or winter rather than summer. And intense exercise is still hard, so my muscles still hurt when I move. But there is no problem at all with daily life. In terms of results and satisfaction, I think I made the right choice. All that fat that never went away no matter how much I exercised is clearly gone, and to my eyes the contour has definitely changed. Personally I got a satisfying result from the inner and outer thigh liposuction. They say it will get even slimmer as the swelling goes down, so I will look forward to that and I will post another review later. I hope this helps anyone who is on the fence.


This is my one-month review! First of all, the bruising completely disappeared in about two and a half weeks so it was no bother at all, and the major swelling was gone within three weeks! This must be what people mean when they say the surgeon's hands matter I heard stem cells are good for this, so I think that played a part too! They say aftercare matters a lot with lipo, so I am watching my diet and taking care of myself. In three months I want to be walking around in great shape hahaha


Now that six months have passed since surgery, I feel my arm contour and the accessory breast area have been shaped very naturally. Before, when I kept my arms down, the accessory breast tissue would fold or stand out and it bothered me, but now my arm line falls smoothly and the overall silhouette is clean. I have no hesitation wearing short sleeves or sleeveless tops, and my clothes fit much better, so I am very satisfied. My arms and upper body feel lighter, and I go about my life as naturally as someone who always had a slim upper body. The scars gradually faded over time, and right now you can hardly see them unless you look up close. There was not much discomfort or stress from the scars during recovery either. The bruising healed quickly from right after surgery and most of it was gone within about a week. The swelling also went down gradually after the early period without much discomfort, and it was never bad enough to interfere with daily life. These days I never find myself thinking about the surgical area during daily life, and I feel as comfortable as if I had never had surgery. The whole recovery process felt very natural, and I feel the result has settled in stably. Overall I am very satisfied with the contour improvement, the recovery speed, and how it feels. I want to have other areas done too.


It has finally been six months since I had hip fat grafting along with full liposuction of my lower abdomen and thighs! The residual swelling is almost all gone now and it feels like this is the final result, so I wanted to write down the changes I have felt. I dieted alongside it and lost about 8kg in total, and I am still maintaining it. What really made me feel the effect of lipo is that even when I slip up on my diet and eat a lot, the fat does not come back to the areas I had done the way it used to. Seeing my contour hold up instead of collapsing, I really feel the money was worth it. As for the grafted areas, human greed knows no end, so I went back and forth a lot about whether to have a second graft. But the way my pants fit is incomparable to before surgery, so I have decided to be happy with it! Even six months on, the grafted fat is holding well without any noticeable loss, so my satisfaction is beyond what I expected!


It has been 6 months since my surgery with Dr. Yoongeun Kim! They told me the swelling keeps going down until the 6-month mark and that you have to pass 6 months to see the final contour, so I was waiting for this point, and it really did change a little bit every month Even when I thought the swelling was all gone, there must have been some residual swelling left Even the stubborn fat on my upper arms and abdomen is completely gone and the grafted hip area is holding so well that I would call it my most satisfying surgery haha Both the liposuction and the grafting were done with stem cells so I had high hopes and it seems the fat took well and I love the contour too Even the details like the accessory breast tissue and love handles came out beautifully with no sagging or awkward spots at all, which reminded me again that you should have surgery with an experienced surgeon haha


I had 360-degree arm and accessory breast liposuction together with an arm lift The bruising and the overall recovery speed after surgery were much faster than I expected Right now my upper arm circumference has clearly gone down a lot, my arms feel much lighter and moving around is so much easier Most of all, I can definitely feel how my clothes fit differently The scars are still healing but they have faded noticeably compared to the beginning They said the swelling keeps going down until the 6-month mark, so I am looking forward to the final result once it is all gone haha


The major swelling has clearly gone down and moving around is comfortable now. I can take a simple shower again, and when I touched my arms while washing I could really feel the difference. The skin that used to hang loose is gone, so I can feel the surface area has shrunk. As for the scars, I apply the ointment about three times a day and I can see them getting lighter day by day. When I went in for my one-month follow-up, the doctor told me the scars had faded a lot and that my recovery was fast, which made me so happy! There is still some swelling and the sensation has not fully come back, but it does not interfere with daily life at all. After surgery I have actually started taking better care of my health, so I feel healthier overall. I think it will get even better if I keep managing it and add some stretching!


It has already been 6 months since my surgery. I had my abdomen and love handles done with Dr. Jaeho Cho. I even got a boyfriend and he tells me every day that I have a nice figure...haha Since I gained confidence, dressing up has become fun and I get a lot of compliments, so honestly, thinking back on it, I have no regrets at all.


About six months after liposuction on my abdomen, thighs and knees, it feels like my body contour has almost fully settled. At first the swelling meant I could not feel a big change right away, but as time passed I could really tell the difference. In particular, as my abdomen, flanks and waistline got cleaner, my clothes fit very differently than before. It is not so much that my weight dropped a lot, but more that my whole silhouette became cleaner. My weight is about the same but visually I look so much slimmer haha The bruising and swelling were only there briefly at the start, and the recovery process went by more easily than I expected. I got back to daily life quickly, and there was hardly any period where I felt seriously uncomfortable. Right now I am living comfortably with no swelling or pain. The scars are still a little visible, but I feel like they keep fading as time goes on. They are not noticeable enough to bother me in daily life, and I am keeping up with the care and watching how they go. Overall, this was a surgery I am really satisfied with. It feels like it looks more natural and the result gets better as time passes, so personally I think it was a really good decision


I am 3 months out from arm lipo and the pain is almost completely gone now. There is a very slight bit left, but not enough to be annoying or distracting. Thankfully no keloids formed on the wounds, and since there is just one small one on each side they are not noticeable. I am really satisfied with that part. And my arms are much thinner than before surgery, so I am happy.


It has been 3 months since I had breast fat grafting with Dr. Joongjae Baek! They took fat from my thighs and grafted it to my chest I really regret hesitating for so long because I was scared of the cost and of going under the knife. I should have done it sooner, seriously.. Your quality of life changes, the way clothes look on you changes They told me the fat would take well thanks to the stem cells, and the before-and-after difference is really clear. I am so satisfied!!


It has been 6 months since I had full arm and upper arm root lipo with Dr. Joongjae Baek I had my arms done at another clinic before so this was a revision, and I had my armpits and inner arms done at the same time My arms are thinner overall, and I had been worried that the skin might lose firmness and sag after lipo, but there was none of that and the contour came out clean, so I am satisfied:)


Three months on, I am very satisfied with the result. Once the early swelling and discomfort passed, the contour came out clearly, and my lower abdomen and flank lines in particular look noticeably different. The biggest change was my abdominal silhouette rather than the number on the scale, and my pants definitely fit better. The belly area that used to bother me is cleaned up, so picking out clothes has become much easier. The contour keeps settling more naturally over time, and people around me often ask if I have lost weight. For anyone who wants a clear change in contour rather than simple weight loss, I felt abdominal liposuction is an effective choice. Overall the result, the aftercare and my satisfaction are all high, so personally I would recommend it


It has now been 3 months since my upper arm liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung! The contour has settled a lot over time and everything looks much more natural than before, so I am happy :) In particular, I went on a trip to Southeast Asia exactly two months after surgery, and thanks to that I felt much more confident in my clothes and I think I took a lot of really nice photos! Now that my upper arm line is cleaned up, I have no hesitation wearing short sleeves or sleeveless tops, and I do not worry about my arms in photos anymore, which is great! There was nothing particularly uncomfortable during the 3 months of recovery, and I had no trouble at all with daily life or my travel schedule! Overall I am happy with the result, and now I am just taking care of myself and hoping the contour holds^^


This is my 3-month review after inner and outer thigh, knee and lower abdomen liposuction plus hip dip fat grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim! I am so used to it now that I sometimes forget, but when I look at the before-and-after photos the change is obvious. My inner thighs used to touch because of the fat and now they are apart, my legs look longer and the contour is cleaner. The tight feeling gradually faded after the one-month mark, so moving around is comfortable now. As for scars, there are three in total, one on each groin and one near the tailbone, so there are few of them and they are in spots that are hard to see, but personally the ones in front bother me, so I am getting separate dermatology treatment for them.


It has been a month since my arm liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek and my arm lift with Dr. Jaeho Cho. After the sutures came out in week 2, the swelling went down more and daily life got easier. They said the scars are healing well, so I am going to keep applying the ointment and taking care of them. The scars look neatly closed in a straight line, which I like haha I am massaging the slightly firm spots a bit more. At the one-month mark I went in for low-frequency therapy, and my arm muscles had been feeling tight but they were clearly better after the session. I plan to get one more session and pay even more attention to scar care going forward! As for my arm contour, since I had the lift too, the circumference went down a lot and my arms are much slimmer. There is still some swelling, so I will keep working on the swelling and scar care^^


I never used to even consider trying on jeans, but now I can wear them, and pants from 5 years ago that did not fit now go on easily~!! I could never have imagined jeans because of how they emphasized the Y zone, but now there is none of that and I wear jeans all the time!! My legs used to be blotchy and full of cellulite, but when I look at them now I can feel the contour is smooth and clean, so I am really satisfied!! They told me it is done using stem cells, which sounded like the safest option, and I wanted to go somewhere safe even if it cost a bit more. I have had no side effects and I am living very happily with the result


Honestly.. I am so satisfied. I have to wear a swimsuit in January and normally my first thought would be how to hide my lower body, but now I feel a bit more confident. The thickness of my legs is definitely different, and it is amazing how the saddlebags got carved away. The swelling is probably not all gone yet, but I look much taller and my legs look longer. If just a bit more of the inner swelling goes down it would be perfect haha And at one month the hardness is almost gone, though the spots that rub still hurt a little haha I think I just need to take good care of my skin firmness!! Honestly, now I want to do my arms and calves too lol I will manage it well and keep the result~~


It has already been a month since my thigh lipo! Personally the bruising and recovery were a bit slower than with my upper body, but that is only in comparison haha The recovery speed is still revolutionary for liposuction. There is no hardening and no bumpy contour at all, everything came out smooth, so I am so satisfied.. And the hip dip graft settled in so well that I look great in tight clothes ♥ Thinking about how the contour will show even better once the swelling goes down, I am so excited....! Every time I had a question they answered kindly and quickly, everyone is so nice!!


My belly fat was always such a worry, dieting never worked and I was stressed out, so after a lot of searching around I had surgery with Dr. Yoongeun Kim at TheLINE Plastic Surgery! I had the Waist to Saddlebags procedure covering love handles, thighs and hips, plus the abdomen added on! The swelling dropped fast after the sutures came out and I thought it was all gone, but at 3 months there was even less, and the next month less again! I especially love my abdomen. With my flanks and belly fat gone, wearing clothes feels so light and easy! My pants always used to dig into my waist and I had to hold my stomach in, and now there is none of that, so I am so happy When I touch it there are no lumps or bumps at all and no sagging either! I was worried because they say if you remove a lot of fat the skin can lose firmness and sag, but maybe because it was stem cell liposuction, my skin firmness actually feels better haha It looks natural, like someone who takes good care of their body, so I am extremely satisfied haha


I had 360-degree abdominal and thigh liposuction along with hip fat grafting! I am on the short side and the type whose fat goes to the lower body, plus I had hip dips, so my legs looked even shorter. That is why I focused my consultation on the lower body, and they collected fat from my whole abdomen, thighs, Y zone and knees and grafted it into my hip dips, and the whole contour completely changed! With slimmer thighs and actual hips (??), my legs look longer in photos!!! My backside was a complex for me and I had tried every shapewear and padded underwear out there, but I threw all of that away lol The contour is so pretty and I feel so proud and confident wearing jeans or a tight dress I wanted to wear a bikini after surgery so scars really mattered to me, and even though I had a lot of areas done, there are only two on my hips and one on my tailbone, which is also really great Honestly that is part of why I chose TheLINE Plastic Surgery! The scars are tiny and maybe because of the stem cells, recovery was fast and you can barely see them now! Not that it mattered since they are in spots a bikini would cover anyway,,haha I hope I can manage my weight through the winter and that spring and summer come soon haha


I am now 3 months out from arm and upper arm root liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung and not just my friends but people around me whenever I wear something thin that shows my arm line say I look like I have lost weight haha They cannot pinpoint where exactly, but it looks like I lost weight overall, which is exactly the effect I wanted. I am looking forward to summer even more and so I do not gain weight before then I should lose a little too:)


It has just passed 3 months since my surgery with Dr. Joongjae Baek. I had my upper arm root, accessory breast tissue, upper arms and bra line done. The swelling has gone down a lot and I can see the contour is cleaner than it was early on. They said the residual swelling keeps going down until the 6-month mark, so I am trusting that and waiting!


I started liking the shape from about a month in, and at 3 months I can definitely see the fat settling in more haha The contour looks much more natural and it feels almost completely normal to the touch Best of all, the scars are barely visible so I do not think about them at all when I wear short sleeves, and my satisfaction keeps climbing! It is the kind of surgery that gets prettier with time, so I really think it was a good choice♥


Rather than right after surgery, I could feel the contour getting cleaner as time passed, and now at about 3 months the effect is clearly visible so I am satisfied! People often tell me my proportions look better now that my contour is cleaner than before!haha A lot of people ask if I lost weight or say my contour looks prettier, which honestly makes me happy hehe... The clinic staff were kind and attentive from the first consultation all the way through the follow-ups, so it was easy to keep coming in, and whenever I had questions during recovery they explained things well, which put me at ease It does not look obviously done, it looks natural, like I simply lost weight, so personally I am very satisfied, and it keeps getting slimmer as time goes on, which shows that with lipo you really do have to be patient They said it can keep going down until 6 months, so I am already very happy but also looking forward to it hehe


Picking clothes used to be so stressful because of my upper arms, and even in summer I only ever wore boxy short sleeves In winter I completely avoided knitwear, so after looking into all sorts of options I finally chose liposuction!! At first the bruising and swelling meant I did not feel an immediate change, and early on there was even a period where I looked more swollen But after about a month my arm contour started to come together and the effect became really visible, and from around 3 months the swelling went down and the shape settled nicely!!!! Now at 6 months it feels really natural to the touch and the contour flows smoothly, so it feels perfectly settled!! What I am happiest about is that the fat that used to spread out sideways when I put my arms down is gone, so my upper body looks much slimmer Best of all, I no longer have to think about my arm line when I get dressed! The thing I wished for most before liposuction has been solved!! I just feel sorry for all the time I spent stressing about my upper arms since I was young, and I keep thinking I should have done it sooner


Repeated dieting left my skin loose and I could not find clothes that fit around my arms, so my confidence started slipping. I tried exercise and injections and so on, but it never came back. It got worse after two childbirths, so I looked into it and found out about lipo and arm lift surgery, and I read that Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE has a lot of experience with lifts, and that stem cells help scars heal well and aid recovery, so I decided right away! At the consultation they explained clearly how far the incision would go and about the stem cells, recommended only what I actually needed and emphasized safety, which made me trust them more. On the day of surgery the anesthesia was long and it was a fairly big operation, so my condition was not great, but the operating room staff took such good care of me that I got home safely and from the next day I recovered quickly ~!! They told me the scars are not infected and are healing well The severe swelling that went all the way to my fingertips lasted about a week? and at 2 weeks, then 3 weeks, I gradually got free use of my arms back. With the lumps (?) on my arms gone I look less bulky, which is great and my clothes fit differently too, which I am so happy about!! Now I want to diet hard for my other areas so that from next year I can wear lots of pretty clothes ^^ I really recommend lift surgery to anyone worried about sagging arms .. I will write another review next time.!


About a month after surgery, it feels like the major swelling has gone down a lot. That said, there is still some residual swelling in my lower abdomen, so it feels more like a work in progress than completely finished. Still, my body definitely feels lighter overall. The first change I noticed was in how clothes fit. My stomach sticks out less than before, and the tightness I used to feel when buttoning my pants has gone down a lot The side lines in particular are visibly cleaner. The bruising I had early on is almost all gone, and now there are just a few spots that feel slightly firm to the touch. The clinic told me this is a normal part of recovery, so I am not too worried. Daily life is almost completely comfortable, and I am pretty used to the compression garment by now lol It is only month one so there is still swelling, but it feels like things are heading in the right direction, so I am satisfied. I plan to keep taking care of it and see how the rest goes


I had my thighs and Chanel line done with Dr. Joongjae Baek! When I look at the before photos the difference is really obvious Back when I lost nearly 10kg my friends said my legs had gotten very thin, but while everywhere else kept slimming down I was never satisfied with my thighs Looking back, I think the reason was the stubborn fat Right now I weigh more than I did when I had lost the 10kg, and even so, liposuction really is the answer for contour!haha


It has been 4 months since my thigh liposuction There still seems to be some residual swelling, but compared to last month the contour feels like it keeps getting better My saddlebags used to stick out and I hated how they looked, so I am so happy they are gone haha They say dieting after lipo works like a booster for the results, so I am going to work on my weight too!


Up to week 2 I could not push myself up with my arms to get out of bed and had to use my core, but now at one month I feel about 80% free of the pain Raising my arms even to shoulder height used to be hard, and now I can get almost all the way up to a full raise..? (Only people who have been through it know how big a change that is) Now that the pain has eased I am starting to worry about the scars, and I am hoping they fade soon! The swelling has gone down quite a lot too, so my arms really are much slimmer I am waiting for more of the swelling to go down and I am going to work hard on scar care!


It has been 7 months since my abdomen, love handle, arm and upper arm root lipo with Dr. Joongjae Baek! The hardness is almost gone now so everything feels smooth, and I like it more the more time passes >_< My upper arms are slimmer and my abdomen, what can I say.. the before-and-after difference is clear haha They shaped it so beautifully in every detail that it looks great from every angle lol I am going to keep it this way!


It has been 6 months since my arm and accessory breast liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek. These days there is no pain in the surgical area and no difficulty moving at all, I am living normally, and the wounds are fading a lot. I think the contour will get even prettier if I put in more effort. The aftercare was great too, so I think I made the right choice with TheLINE Plastic Surgery. A decision with no regrets, thank you.


It has been 3 months since my breast fat grafting They took fat from my abdomen and love handles and grafted it to my chest Both areas settled into a very natural shape and contour, so I am satisfied If you are worried about side effects, the graft failing, or it looking unnatural, I think you will have no trouble at TheLINE haha


It has been 6 months since my arm, upper arm root and accessory breast liposuction I had it with Chief Director Dr. Jaeho Cho The contour definitely kept getting cleaner as time passed In particular, the fat on the inner and back of my arms and near my armpits was cleaned up, and comparing with my pre-op photos I can see even better how much slimmer they are The bulge around my elbows is also mostly gone


Sharing my 3-month review after thigh and love handle lipo + hip fat grafting First, the major swelling and bruising in the surgical areas were completely gone after about a month, and the residual swelling seems to have gone down slowly through to the 3-month mark As for pain, it was only in the grafted area, and the suctioned areas caused no real problems in daily life Moving around was fine, and the only inconvenience was not being able to sleep on my side I wore the compression garment like regular clothing and it was not that uncomfortable either There are still scars but I take care of them every day I like my thigh contour and the grafted hip area is still holding well without any loss, so overall I am satisfied!


Christmas is already coming up It has been 3 months since my abdomen and flank lipo with Dr. Yoongeun Kim Now I look slim in anything I wear, so even in this cold weather lol I only wear tight clothes I had heard that liposuction can cause skin dents if it is done badly, but thankfully nothing like that happened at TheLINE If there is one thing I regret, it is thinking that if I had done the liposuction in winter, the compression garment would have kept me warm and I would have worn it more happily?haha If any of you are planning liposuction for the end of the year, do it this winter!! haha


I had arm and upper arm root liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho! From the start the doctor told me my arms are on the muscular side so it would be hard to expect a bone arm, so I lowered my expectations, but even accounting for that a lot came off and I am so satisfied It feels like he removed the stubborn fat from every corner while leaving the muscle haha In particular the bulges at the back and side are noticeably gone, and I think that is what makes the whole contour look different Maybe because of the stem cells the doctor mentioned, I had hardly any bruising, and the scars healed fast so you can barely see them now All the clinic staff were kind and the system was so well organized that there was almost no waiting on my consultation day or my surgery day I want to have other areas done next time hahaha


It has been 3 months since my arm lift + liposuction :) I had it with Dr. Jaeho Cho! Time really flies! It has already been 3 months:) The swelling is completely gone and my scars are still red so I am wearing Mepiform. Nothing is uncomfortable and I just hope the scars fade soon haha I have gained a little weight lately but people think I lost some, which is funny lol These days I want to save up and have other areas done too!♥


This is my one-month review after arm and armpit liposuction! After about a month, raising my arms overhead is comfortable and I am living without any inconvenience. The surgical scars are not big so they do not bother me and I am satisfied. They said it keeps improving until the 3-month mark, so I am looking forward to it haha Now that the contour is cleaner, I am definitely happier wearing tight clothes or cardigans~ There was less pain after surgery than I expected, and the hardness and my arm mobility got better quickly, so recovery was fast too!


I had arm and accessory breast liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. I hesitated a lot at first, but the person who did my consultation was really kind and explained everything in detail, which built my trust. On the day of surgery they guided me calmly so my nerves settled a lot, and during recovery they answered my questions quickly, so I felt looked after the whole time. It has now been about 3 months since surgery, the swelling is almost gone and my arm contour is clearly cleaner, so my satisfaction is high. The inner part of my upper arm is smoother and my contour looks much slimmer in a T-shirt, so people around me say they can see the change. The facilities were clean and the staff kept checking in on me, so the overall experience was good.


Through exercise and diet I went from 84kg to 73kg, losing 10kg and getting my weight into a normal range, but my lower abdomen still stuck out unusually and I felt this was not something diet or exercise would fix. I worried a lot about whether liposuction might leave my skin sagging or leave scars, but I did not want to keep stressing about my belly fat, so I finally decided to have surgery. What stood out about TheLINE was how they explained in detail the very things I was worried about, like skin sagging and how natural the abdominal contour would look, and proposed the approach that fit my situation. Surgery felt vaguely frightening at first, but thanks to the kind staff and a trustworthy consultation, I became confident that this was the right place. There were no side effects at all, and after a month the swelling keeps going down and I can clearly see in the mirror that the volume on my flanks has decreased, which is amazing. They say it usually takes about 3 months for the final contour to settle, so for now I am managing the swelling and waiting for the final result.


I had arm and accessory breast lipo with Dr. Joongjae Baek and an arm lift with Dr. Yoosuk Chung! There was almost no bruising after the arm lift and lipo! Maybe because of the stem cells... anyway I was amazed at how little bruising there was Early on I worried about the swelling and the scars, but now at one month it has recovered a lot Considering how many incisions there were, recovery is fast and the scars are healing neatly!! What struck me most about TheLINE is that you can really feel how well they handle aftercare, which made it even better It is only month one so I need to keep watching, but for now the sagging areas have visibly shrunk and I am so happy haha I plan to keep watching and work hard on the aftercare


I had liposuction on my abdomen, love handles, thighs and Chanel line and had the fat grafted to my hips and chest The most amazing thing after surgery was that, maybe because I had grafting done too, it was not just like losing weight, my whole figure got shaped Most of all, it is amazing how the contour stays the same whether I gain or lose weight The scars have faded a lot too Now that surgery gave me a contour, I can wear clothes I never could before, so I am very satisfied Thank you, Dr. Yoosuk Chung^^


For the first week the swelling hadn't gone down yet so the contour wasn't showing much, but once a month passed my waist really tucked in and I've been showing it off lately. All the pants I used to wear got so big they practically slide off.. hoho Best of all is the recovery★ it's honestly insane. I was already out and about within a week, but at the one-month mark I wonder, did I even have surgery?! It doesn't hurt at all and the bruising is almost completely gone. The scars are so faint that you can't see them unless you look for them. The best..! On top of that my skin is smooth with no lumpiness, so people who don't know keep asking how I lost so much weight and complimenting my contour.. I'm so happy..♥ When I wear something fitted, the contour is just so satisfying..! As a genuine paid-out-of-my-own-pocket review, I'm so happy I had my surgery at TheLINE. I've already referred three friends★ hoho. The staff who handle the aftercare are all so kind, and my coordinator and Director Boyoung have been great every time I visit, so the fact that I already booked another surgery is a secret.. haha


It's been 3 months since my abdomen, love handles, thighs and hip dip grafting surgery. I've pretty much forgotten I had it done haha The scars are still slightly there, so when I see them I go, oh right, I had surgery I didn't watch my diet so some weight came back, but what I see in the mirror is completely different from before, so no regrets haha I think anyone who's had the surgery will relate, what you see with your eyes is different and the parts that bothered me in clothes are definitely smoother haha The number one satisfaction spot is the back of my thighs .. totally different, and now that this area is gone the upper belly and upper back fat I never cared about are what bother me a little I can't say it doesn't hurt, but the pain is brief while the parts that bothered me my whole life are gone and the contour is cleaned up, so I really recommend it!!!! My second round of hip grafting is coming up soon lol the first round held up well so the doctor is going to shape it more Definitely do hip dip grafting + waist together, the effect isn't 2x it's 100x, seriously!!!!


Hello!^^ It's been 6 months since Dr. Yoongeun Kim did my hip dip fat grafting. I can't believe that much time has already passed. The first two months felt like the change came in slowly, then from month 3-4 the contour really came together and now it feels completely natural, like it's just my own body. People keep telling me my lower body proportions look different, so I feel proud every time I take a photo. I used to stress so much about angles and poses, but now the contour shows even when I'm just standing there, so it's easy. The hip dip area has settled in more naturally and softly as time passes, so I'm very satisfied. I think "the default setting of my body has changed" is exactly the right way to put it. Working out is fun now, and as my confidence in my body grows, daily life feels much lighter too. For anyone who has worried about their body shape like I did, I sincerely recommend it♥


It's been 6 months since my stem cell arm liposuction. Looking back now, I think it was really the right choice. I hesitated because I'm in my 40s, but there was almost no bruising or swelling right after, so recovery was really fast and going back to daily life was easy. As time passed my arm contour came together naturally, and my clothes fit differently, so I'm more satisfied every time I look in the mirror. People around me keep saying I look slimmer, so my confidence has grown too. If there's anyone in their 40s hesitating about the procedure, I'd say don't hold back just because of your age, it's worth considering. In my experience the burden was small and the result is very satisfying.


Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my 360-degree arm liposuction I'm at 3 months now and the contour has come together a lot, so I'm satisfied My upper body used to look bulky because of my upper arms, but that's gone now


It's already been 6 months, half a year, since my procedure Dr. Yoongeun Kim did my abdomen, love handles and breast fat grafting Work got busy from late August and I finished late, so I ate a lot and couldn't manage myself, but luckily I didn't gain much more The scars are barely visible, and it kept changing a little each month until now it seems mostly settled Best of all, my love handles are gone and the contour has held, so wearing an H-line skirt or a fitted dress is comfortable and the contour looks great Removing fat mattered, but breast fat grafting was what I wanted and aimed for the most, so I couldn't work out for fear of losing the grafted fat, though I'm about to start soon The breast fat graft is still holding up well! Honestly, from my own experience, liposuction really helps with cleaning up your contour and it's the best???? Next time I'll post about how my contour looks after working out post-liposuction haha


Dr. Jaeho Cho did my surgery~ Once I hit my mid-30s my upper arm fat wouldn't budge no matter how much I worked out, and I looked so frumpy in sleeveless tops, so I decided on liposuction Now at 6 months I have zero regrets! Every time I see room left in my sleeves when I put on a top, I just think I'm glad I did it haha You only have a rough 1-3 weeks after surgery (not that it's really rough.. just the discomfort of the compression garment..?) Month by month the swelling in my arms goes down, the contour comes together, and I feel confident in my clothes. I didn't really do any aftercare and only went to Pilates casually, and this is how much came off haha It keeps coming off as time passes, so patience is a must


I'm at 3 months and as the swelling has gone down a lot, my contour is noticeably cleaner. There's almost no discomfort, so just like the reviews I read, daily life feels completely normal, like it's just my own body. There still seems to be a little swelling around my stomach, but I think it will improve more if I keep taking care of it. They told me it goes down gradually until the 6-month mark. I started diet and exercise after 2 months and I'm not going hard at it, yet I can still see the weight coming off. I want to manage the swelling and scars well from here so I can dress with more confidence! Thank you.


It's been a month since my surgery~ I definitely feel like I don't gain weight even eating the same amount, which is great!! My abdomen was a revision meant to refine the contour, and I did it together with hip dip grafting, so I think the contour looks even better! I slept flat on my back instead of on my side so the grafted fat on my hips wouldn't be lost haha At one month it's holding up well with barely any loss, so I'm satisfied!


At first walking was a little uncomfortable, but after about 2 weeks daily life was no problem Up to the 1-month mark I thought there wasn't much change because of the swelling, but it kept going down and by 3 months my thighs are noticeably slimmer and the contour is coming together~~ I even have a gap between my inner thighs haha Now my contour falls much more nicely even in slim-fit pants, so I'm very satisfied


The upper arm fat I thought would never come off got cleaned up with liposuction, so I'm very satisfied! I'm working out consistently now to keep it up! Comparing the photos surprises even me, and people around me keep asking why my arms are so thin lol


Hello I worried about the extra flesh on my thighs for years. I tried working out and dieting, but the inner thigh fat especially just wouldn't come off. In the end I made a big decision and had liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE, and I'm really satisfied. Recovery after surgery was faster than I expected, and there was no big inconvenience going back to daily life. At first I worried about swelling and pain, but after about a week it was comfortable enough that I barely noticed it With the extra flesh naturally cleaned up, my clothes look much better on me. One thing that surprised me is that my weight hasn't gone up even though my eating habits are the same as before. I usually have a big appetite so I was worried, but my appetite is the same after surgery and my weight is holding steady, which is amazing. At first I worried about side effects and scarring so I researched a lot, but in my case I recovered without any problems. Most of all, it was done safely and the result is good, which is what satisfies me most. If you have similar worries, please get a thorough consultation I'm happy with my result right now.


Right after surgery there was bruising and stiffness, but from month 3 the contour started coming together, and now at 6 months the swelling is almost gone, so my upper arms look much slimmer in short sleeves. The fat at the back of my arms that used to fold has been naturally cleaned up, so I don't have to worry about camera angles anymore. Combining massage with light exercise has improved my firmness a lot. With the upper arm fat gone my upper body looks much slimmer, and people keep asking me "did you lose weight?"


This much time has passed since Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my arm lift and liposuction. When I wrote my 1-month review there was still some swelling, but after 3 months it's clearly different! The biobond firmness I had at 1 month has almost completely loosened up and my skin has gotten so soft. As the swelling went down the contour is finally showing properly, and it's really smooth and slim! Especially the saggy inner arm flesh, which now feels firm and lifted thanks to the arm lift, and I love it. The best part is that there's no flapping flesh when I raise my arms. Dressing is fun again these days. I used to wear only loose clothes to hide my arms, but now I confidently wear fitted knits and thin long sleeves. The reactions around me are amazing too. Everyone goes "how did you lose the arm fat, your arm contour is a work of art." It's amazing that a part that wouldn't change with exercise changed like this. The surgical marks have faded and lightened a lot compared to the beginning, so they don't bother me either. If you have upper arms like mine and are thinking about it, I really recommend it.


Hello! Leaving my 6-month review after arm liposuction. The bulge at the back of my arms stressed me out, so after thinking it over I decided on the procedure. At first there was a lot of swelling so I worried, but now most of it has come down naturally. The bulging feeling of my arm fat is clearly reduced compared to before, and the back bulge that bothered me most is straight now, so I'm satisfied I kept up the early aftercare (wearing the compression garment, managing the swelling) and I'm watching my diet to some degree to maintain it. I plan to keep up exercise and aftercare from here. I hope this is a small reference for anyone considering liposuction :)


You can feel it right away from the photos. Straight shoulders achieved. Exactly the healthy, toned look I wanted At 3 months the biobond firmness is almost gone (I barely had any to begin with). The scars aren't visible unless you deliberately raise your arm and line up the angle. Even my mom has no idea I had surgery. And I don't plan to tell her haha My biggest satisfaction point at 3 months Breaking free from diet obsession. This is the big one. Before, even gaining 1kg stressed me out, and because of my arms I always had a "puffy-looking body" relative to my weight, so I was constantly self-conscious. But my weight on the day of liposuction versus now? Almost no change. I already knew it isn't a procedure that changes the number much unless you do your whole body. But... when what you see in the mirror changes, your life changes. My weight is the same, but with my arm contour cleaned up I'm free from the obsessive stress I used to feel. These days I'm just comfortable. I'm waiting for summer so I can wear sleeveless tops as much as I want. Honestly, I wish I'd done it sooner haha The clinic choice was a success too Picking a clinic based on minimal scarring and fast recovery was a genius move. If you prefer overall balance rather than that feeling of scooping out huge amounts, you'll be especially satisfied. I recommend it to anyone who wants a natural, clean contour like I did.


I had thigh liposuction on August 14 and 3 months are now going by. Up to the second month the change felt very gradual. But entering the third month I can clearly see the contour coming together more naturally. My silhouette in clothes especially looks more settled, so my satisfaction has gone up a lot. The swelling is still going down, and my body outline feels smoother than before. It's still changing little by little, so I really feel that it takes time. There's almost no discomfort in daily life, and the stiffness I had early on has decreased a lot. There are still a few spots that feel firm to the touch, but not enough to be uncomfortable, so I just do some stretching and light massage. The scars still have a bit of redness so I keep applying ointment, and I keep moisturizing to prevent pigmentation.


Hello^^ It's already 6 months since my arm and accessory breast liposuction!! I think all the swelling is gone now~ The remaining puffiness definitely keeps going down as time passes, so my arms are much slimmer than before and thanks to that I can wear fitted cardigans~ The scars have faded a lot and there's no discomfort at all haha Seeing my arm contour clearly cleaned up, I'm really satisfied!! Why didn't I do it sooner ..lol that's my only regret lol If you're thinking about liposuction, I highly recommend TheLINE Plastic Surgery!!


The slow time went by and by and it's already 6 months since my liposuction haha I decided on abdomen and arm liposuction as a birthday present to myself, and on the day of surgery I slept well without much pain and I remember being surprised there was so little bruising For a while the compression garment felt stuffy and there was swelling, so it was a bit hard, and early on I whined to the director and the clinic staff that less had come off than I expected haha I trusted the doctor when he said swelling keeps going down until the 6-month mark, and thought I'd add some aftercare, so I watched my diet a bit without exercising and from that point the swelling and the fat really came off fast I used to wear large in both underwear and pants, and now I have to switch everything to small, all my old clothes are too big I've had a straight waist and belly fat since middle school, and now with childbirth and my age I never expected a flat stomach like the young ones, but I'm really, really satisfied. Diet alone would never have gotten me here I'm also really happy with my upper arm contour now ~ My upper body always looked heavier than my lower body, which stressed me out, and now I've been told I look slim for the first time hahaha Thank you so much to Dr. Joongjae Baek for operating beautifully without overdoing it, and to the director and staff who always looked after me so kindly, even emotionally I referred a few people around me recently too hahaha I'm sure they'll be treated as well as I was if they mention me haha That's the end of my review~!


Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my liposuction + fat grafting! My overall contour was my concern so I did almost full-body liposuction except my arms 360-degree abdomen plus love handles, Y-zone, thighs and knees, and I wanted to fill my hip dips and create a pelvic contour so I did hip fat grafting together! After surgery it hurt less than I expected which surprised me, and by week 1-2 most of the bruising was gone so I looked like someone who hadn't had surgery lol While reading reviews I saw a lot about stem cell fat grafting but not about stem cell liposuction, so I wondered how it would be, and just as the doctor said, recovery was fast and the scars healed quickly! They're barely visible now hehe The best part after surgery is that whatever I wear is clearly different from before...!! I only wear crop tops or fitted clothes now and my pants fit so nicely, I could cry I'm 157cm so I'm on the short side. Before, I had no waist and my thighs stuck out more than my hips so my proportions were bad, but now that my proportions are better I look taller from a distance, and in photos especially you'd never guess I'm 157 lol Even if I eat a lot and gain a little, the contour doesn't break, it just adds on, so I never gain weight in an unflattering way like before If you want to build a contour like I did, definitely go to a doctor with a lot of experience and a good aesthetic sense haha


Dr. Joongjae Baek did my arm liposuction~! At first there was swelling so I just waited for it to go down, and as it went down the contour clearly emerged! You can tell in the photos, but in real life too my arms are thinner in short sleeves so my upper body looks smaller and I'm so satisfied! He said stem cells help scars heal faster, and maybe that's why my scars are barely visible, which I love too


Hello. It's already been 6 months since I had abdominoplasty together with abdominal liposuction. Dr. Joongjae Baek did the liposuction and Dr. Jaeho Cho did the abdominoplasty. I finally feel like my body is settling into place. Right after surgery my abdomen felt tight and it was hard to straighten up, so I remember walking hunched over like an old lady for a few days. But as one month and then two months passed, the swelling went down bit by bit, and looking at myself in the mirror I thought, "ah, this is why everyone gets abdominoplasty." At first I worried, 'did I go too far with such a big surgery,' but now I think it was really the right choice for myself. As my body changed, my mood brightened along with it.


It's been a month since my upper breast volume grafting~ They took fat from my thighs and grafted it, and the volume came out naturally, which I love The upper space of my A-cup bra was always empty and gaping, but now that bra is completely filled Nothing has been lost yet and it's holding up well, I hope it stays like this!hehe


It's now been about a month since my arm liposuction At first it was hard to even lift my arms and they throbbed, but now there's almost no pain The bruising is nearly gone and I can see the swelling going down bit by bit, so I'm satisfied My arm contour looks much cleaner in clothes and I find myself looking in the mirror often It hasn't fully settled yet so there's a slightly heavy feeling, but it doesn't get in the way of daily life at all! I expect them to get even thinner once the swelling is fully gone, and to the touch they used to feel hard from the swelling but now they're much softer Early on it hurt so much I wondered why I did it, but now I'm glad I got through it!


The red marks over the scars have faded a lot and there's almost no pain, but when my condition is off I still get occasional pain and the red marks seem to spread a little Exercise is too much for now, and the doctor said it's too much for 4 months, so I'm only doing breathing exercises hahaha It's already 3 months~!! Time really flies..!! It feels like just yesterday I was surprised by how loose my short sleeves got and now wearing long sleeves brings another surprise o0o I had no idea arms had such a big effect on the upper body! I only ever cared about belly fat.. I'm really feeling it this time!! I look slimmer in long sleeves and hearing that I look delicate / that I should gain a little weight, things I'd never heard in my life, feels so good...>..<


Three months have passed since Dr. Joongjae Baek did liposuction on my arms, abdomen and thighs~! First of all my body really feels lighter and my clothes fit completely differently! My arms, abdomen and thigh contours were all cleaned up so my clothes feel different and I'm so happy every time I look in the mirror At first the swelling was bad so I worried, but after a month the swelling went down and the contour definitely settled in. Now most of the swelling is gone and my whole body feels smoothly put together. Best of all, recovery was fast so I got back to daily life quickly! I thought about the surgery for a long time, but I really want to recommend it.


It's now 3 months since liposuction on my whole abdomen, love handles and thighs plus hip dip grafting Up to about the second month there was a slight feeling that it wasn't quite my own flesh, but now there's no pain or swelling at all, so I'd forgotten about it to the point of wondering when I even had surgery! I didn't do any special diet or exercise and ate what I wanted, yet it's holding up well, so far^^ And at one month after surgery I wasn't fully happy with the hip dip grafting so I had a second fat grafting session, and since my fat was stored I could book the surgery date right away, which was great~ After the second grafting the contour became dramatic, so I'm very satisfied with the result!!! Some friends of mine who had liposuction elsewhere say the suctioned areas got hard or the skin looks rippled, but I don't have anything like that. TheLINE clearly does it safely and well, so I feel like I chose the clinic really well>< I think I just need to take care of myself so my body doesn't change over the next 6 months and a year♥


Upper body - arm, abdomen and love handle liposuction thigh liposuction hip fat grafting, that's what I had done and it's now a little over two months! Even early on I was very happy with the fat grafted areas, but honestly I wasn't sure about the liposuction areas because of the swelling and bruising. But yes, with liposuction you have to wait........hahaha As it settles and the swelling goes down my satisfaction keeps growing lol By week 3-4 the bruising was almost gone and the swelling dropped fast, so the outline started showing The hip fat grafting and the liposuction were all done as stem cell surgery, with Dr. Joongjae Baek. He was kind and very thorough during the consultation so I came to trust him, and it could have been embarrassing but he was gentlemanly about it, which I was so grateful for.. Anyone who's had a liposuction consultation knows this feeling..hahaha My biggest stress points were my hip dips and the flesh sticking out at the bottom of my thighs, and since those were my biggest complexes, those areas give me the most satisfaction now!! The hollowed hip dip area was amazingly filled in?? I'm not sure that's the right word, but the hip dip area got filled in and it's amazing They say it usually settles down a bit over time so I'm watching it, but at two months it's holding up well! I'll have to watch a bit longer to see whether the stem cell grafting has an effect, but so far I'm very satisfied The protruding flesh on my thighs was cleaned up too, so my contour looks smooth overall. With all the unnecessary extra flesh gone, my clothes look different too. My arms used to make me look bulky, but now I feel like I'm back to normal? haha It hasn't fully settled yet so the change is still in progress, but so far I'm very, very satisfied The compression garment is uncomfortable but I think you really have to wear it exactly as the clinic says, and drinking water and light stretching were effective for reducing swelling. In conclusion, two months on, my thought is "I'm glad I did it"!


It's been exactly one month since my arm liposuction. The bruising was completely gone 2 weeks after surgery. My skin has good elasticity and I recover fast, so the swelling settled quickly too. And because they put stem cells back in, my recovery feels much faster. I've taken off the compression garment completely now. Since I got the body care the clinic provided, the swelling went down more and my arm contour got much smoother. Until a few days ago my armpit area felt a bit pinched, but now even that is gone. At one month the biobond firmness is completely gone, there's no tight feeling, and the parts that felt hard to the touch have softened a lot. My arm contour is settling in completely too. The flesh that used to bulge out at the sides has been straightened out a lot. There's still a little swelling, so I'm looking forward to how my upper arm contour turns out.


I'm at 6 months after abdomen and love handle (flank) liposuction The pain and the feeling that it wasn't my own flesh are all gone, and I've even forgotten I had it done haha The scars have faded quite a lot even though I didn't take care of them!! Most people diet while getting liposuction, but I didn't manage myself after mine so I gained a lot of weight...?! Still, my carved-out love handles didn't gain, so my clothes fit well for my weight hehehe A round of applause for Dr. Joongjae Baek, who carved my once-abundant love handles into a curve... I'm about to start dieting now, please let this state hold...!!


It's 6 months since Dr. Joongjae Baek did my arm and accessory breast liposuction, time really flies Apart from right after surgery I've had no discomfort, and maybe because my arm contour got prettier I wore only sleeveless tops all summer, and now that winter is coming I've started wearing long sleeves and the clothes I wore last year look completely different this year I only did my arms and yet even my shoulder line looks different How did I dress before liposuction, ugh Now it feels familiar and natural, as if this was always my arm size The incisions were so small that even though I didn't do any special scar care they healed well, and at 6 months they've faded even more so I don't notice them at all!!


My first surgery went badly, and the lumpiness on the front of my abdomen stressed me out so much. I couldn't go to the bathhouse.. and when clothes clung to me the lumpiness stressed me out.... So I had surgery on my abdomen and love handles This is one month after this surgery.. The front looks like the lumpy parts have been cleaned up compared to before, but the back looks like a bit less has come off, slightly wrinkled, so I got anxious and so worried that it weighed on my mind. So I went back to see Dr. Baek and asked about it. He said that can happen since it's only one month, and because I was so worried he warmly told me not to worry, that if it's still like that much later on he would take responsibility, which reassured me so much and moved me. I'm thinking of doing liposuction on my thighs once my abdomen has recovered. And I'm planning to have Dr. Baek do that one too.


After thinking it over I had abdominal liposuction a month ago I did my love handles too I had a fair amount of fat, so I had high hopes for how my contour would change. Dr. Yoosuk Chung did the surgery, and right after I woke from the anesthesia I could feel the fat was gone, which was truly moving. Right now it looks fuller again because of the swelling, but I believe it will keep improving. The swelling actually came up more later than right after surgery Waking up from the anesthesia was a bit hard because my body was shaking, and the pain felt similar to muscle soreness after a heavy workout. It's still uncomfortable but bearable enough, and I'm going about daily life I hope the swelling goes down soon~


First I narrowed it down to a few well-known places with no side effects and went for consultations. Among them this was where I felt most at ease during the consultation and the doctor had long experience, so I trusted them and decided on surgery. At another place I was put off by a somewhat mocking tone, but TheLINE Plastic Surgery was kind and consulted me sincerely. I went for upper arm liposuction, and they didn't exaggerate by saying I'd definitely get bone-thin arms, they told me realistically what to expect, which I actually preferred. The consultation director, the front desk staff and the people who helped with aftercare were all so kind that I felt at ease every visit. It's been a month since the surgery and I can definitely see that my arms are thinner than before! They say it takes three to as long as six months for the swelling to go down, so I'm looking forward to them getting even thinner^^


It's already been 6 months since my surgery at TheLINE, time really flies It feels like just yesterday that washing, taking off and putting on the compression garment was such a hassle... When I visited TheLINE for a follow-up check, Dr. Yoosuk Chung said it would keep going down until the 6-month mark. I was too lazy to work hard at the diets I kept repeating,,, but still, my weight before and after differs by almost 10kg, and the measurement differences (especially my arms) were big enough that my relatives and friends were surprised at Chuseok this year. After some time my eyes had gotten used to my body and I was just starting to feel less excited, so this was a fresh boost. And my body has definitely become efficient for dieting, if that's the way to put it? This holiday was long and I was out meeting lots of friends, so I was gaining 1kg a day? Since I decided not to gain more after liposuction, I diet the moment I gain, and this time too I'm doing a fast-gain-fast-loss cycle of at least 0.4-0.8kg a day. Right now I've already lost 2.3kg over two days. Before, no matter how fast I gained, losing it meant days of plateau, so I naturally stopped dieting. So I wonder, did the old stagnant fat get pulled out? It's kind of amazing. Anyway everyone.. Get liposuction and really see the light Without liposuction I think I would have spent these 6 months with no change at all, but watching my contour change made me think about my body and got me into the good habit of going to work out at least once a week haha


It's been 1 month since my upper arm liposuction at TheLINE! At first the bruising was so bad it scared me, but it seemed to fade quickly as time passed, so I was reassured I'd heard Dr. Yoosuk Chung is meticulous, and it really feels like he removed the fat carefully into a pretty contour, so I loved it There's still some residual swelling but I'm looking forward to more as time goes by The nurse in the operating room was so kind, which was great! I want to get my aftercare soon


I'm past the 3-month mark now, and I regret the time I spent hesitating instead of having the surgery. As time passed, the lumpiness and tightness I felt early after surgery have now completely disappeared. Most of the sensation has come back too, and daily life is comfortable enough that I forget I had surgery. At 3 months, maybe because even the residual swelling is gone, the change in my contour is the most obvious. The love handles and front of my abdomen that worried me most have noticeably reduced in volume. My weight hasn't changed much, yet my silhouette itself is slimmer, so people often tell me I've lost a lot of weight. Most of all, dressing has become more enjoyable. I used to be busy hiding my fit, but now even in just a shirt or a T-shirt you can see my flank contour is cleanly defined, which I'm happy with. The gynecomastia surgery site has settled into a very natural shape too. Thanks to that I don't worry about other people's eyes at the gym or the sauna. Seeing my contour cleaned up by surgery also motivates me more to work out. Wanting to maintain this change makes me keep taking care of myself. I had a lot of doubts before deciding on surgery, but now that 3 months have passed I think it was the right choice every time I look in the mirror. Thank you to Dr. Yoongeun Kim for operating so meticulously and following up on my progress so well.


It's been 6 months since my arm liposuction. These days I completely forget I ever had liposuction surgery. The weather is nice so I've been buying workout clothes to exercise, and size S or even XS tops fit me well. The point of "fitting well" is that even in S/XS there's room left in the sleeves. ^^ Not just when taking photos but also every morning and evening when I put on lotion and bend my arms, my satisfaction with my arms goes up. ^^ Because my upper arms are thin, my torso no longer looks like one big mass. Most of all, the line that drops at a right angle from my shoulder blade satisfies me every time I see it. Dieting is an unavoidable topic in conversations among women, and whenever diet comes up I shout "highly recommend liposuction" and push it hard. They say arms in particular can be called the flower of liposuction, and I fully agree. Because the difference shows! So clearly! It's an area people see right away~~~ ^^ Now that winter is here, my only regret is not being able to show my arms. I'm so grateful to Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE Plastic Surgery for suctioning with the body's contour and balance in mind rather than just aiming to remove fat. Having it done by Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE, and having it done with stem cell technology, was truly the best choice. ^^ If you're hesitating over whether to do it, I know it's a hard decision, but keep the hesitation short and go get it done~ What I regret most these days is not having done it back when I was single, before I wore my wedding dress... !!^^


I think there are areas that just won't slim down no matter how much you exercise As I got older I put on age-related weight and my body isn't what it used to be, and the part that stressed me out most was my arms!! My arms were unusually thick compared to everywhere else, so it stressed me out even more Then I was referred to TheLINE, known for arm liposuction, had a consultation with Dr. Joongjae Baek and went straight to surgery While doing arm liposuction I did my accessory breast tissue and bra line together since I was already there, and it's already been 6 months I should have done it sooner I'm very satisfied!! If you're hesitating, just do it!! It's an adipose stem cell liposuction procedure so there were no side effects and recovery after surgery was fast, I highly recommend it!!!


I'm not dieting so I'm eating comfortably, but even so my upper arms don't gain weight like before, which I love. Now even when I wear fitted clothes my upper arms don't bother me much. If anything, since my upper arms got thinner people say I look like I lost weight, which makes me so happy. Liposuction really does seem to be the best answer for upper arm fat.


It's now been 6 months since my arm and accessory breast liposuction revision. I did a lot of searching about liposuction too, and in the end I had it done by Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE. To get straight to the point, I'm really satisfied. No regrets at all. The contour came together fairly quickly, and since I film videos often I could see the change with my own eyes. That said, liposuction alone absolutely does not make you lose weight. Exercise is a must. I'm doing 1:1 Pilates posture correction alongside it, and the contour is coming together much faster. You really have to exercise too. Four or five years ago I rushed into a LAMS procedure. Back then I went by name alone because they said it was a good place for liposuction, but my abdominal contour ended up oddly dented, to the point that I couldn't even wear a bikini. After that I was too scared to touch it, until this time I researched properly and went ahead. The result? Very satisfied. I learned a lot this time. Whether it's plastic surgery or a procedure, don't decide based on promotional pricing or a famous name, get it done properly by a skilled doctor, that's the answer lol In the end that's the way to save money, time and your sanity!


Dr. Joongjae Baek did my thigh liposuction~ I'm at 3 months now and the swelling seems almost gone and the contour is definitely cleaned up, so I'm satisfied^^


Honestly, with time passing I'd forgotten I even had surgery, and then I saw my friends after a while and they asked why I lost so much weight, and only then did I think, oh right, I had surgery lol It looks so natural that I really love it >_< I took photos after a while and compared 1 month, 3 months and 6 months, and wow, it had gotten even cleaner?? I hadn't realized it, but the slightly lumpy-looking spots became smooth too, which surprised me It makes me wonder if the contour keeps getting cleaner for about a year if I wait longer! I think the lumpiness was probably from the biobond, and I'm guessing it got smooth because the biobond gradually disappeared I didn't even know it was lumpy before (my friends never said anything either!) but comparing the photos with now, I could tell because it's smooth now! Amazing I'm taking care of myself to keep this contour without gaining weight, but does that mean I'm dieting hard? Nope!! I eat three proper meals and stretch once a day and since I'm an office worker sitting at a desk I have to stretch in the evening, ugh Also I've held steady from 56 -> 50.3 before surgery, so I eat with peace of mind, but looking at the photos again makes me greedy lol I lost weight, should I try building abs?!! With the fat removed, weight comes off more easily so it drops fast even without exercise, don't suffer through diets.... and don't force yourself to fast Just get liposuction, manage your diet, drop the weight quickly and maintain it, it's a whole new world Liposuction is seriously amazing!!! And rather than a place that dangerously removes huge amounts, you should go to a clinic that brings out a pretty contour suited to your body Also, just looking at online communities there's so much talk about side effects, it makes me sad You really should filter out ads promising huge removal, and at TheLINE the doctor and the nurses emphasized safe surgery from the consultation onward! And because the consultation is detailed and personalized I asked tons of questions and everything was answered without a hitch, they even drew diagrams and showed me charts, so detailed.... I didn't even ask for that much detail lol we talked for an hour lol the doctor explained with his eyes shining and there was no attitude of being annoyed at all! You don't need to feel awkward even if you ask a storm of questions! Ask away!! Also the nurses are really kind It's surgery after all, so all the nurses are kind and take good care of you to keep the mood light They handle the aftercare meticulously too There are 2 post-op care sessions (biobond) and the staff who do them chat with you and answer everything you're curious about The clinic is also very clean The floors are well separated so I think the process is even better organized! At first I chose to consult at TheLINE because it uses your own stem cells so it's safer with faster recovery, but the reason I paid after the consultation with the doctor was that my trust was 100%, so I paid right away Also when I went for my 3-month follow-up they checked in detail and consulted with me, and the follow-up care after surgery was good too, so I'm still satisfied Oh, and after surgery my coordinator contacted me, texted me and stayed in touch constantly so I wouldn't forget! That management system is well set up too I need to go in for my 6-month follow-up and while I'm there I'm going to get a consultation for another area I've become interested in my double chin hehe A lot of people are curious about the details, so I'll leave them 161 / 50.5 / pants size 28->25~26 I wear XS~S dresses by Zara sizing


This is my one-month review after inner and outer thigh, knee, and lower abdomen liposuction plus hip dip fat grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim. The swelling and bruising seem to be all gone, and the hard feeling in the suctioned areas has gone down quite a lot. Still, there is a tight feeling, so stretching is a little difficult. The grafted area lost some volume compared to the beginning as the swelling went down, but I can definitely feel that my contour has changed. A lot of the inner and outer thigh fat was cleaned up too, so the overall line feels smoother. The doctor told me that the surgery creates the line and that dieting afterward is my part as maintenance, so I am going to work on that as well. There is still a scar on the front, so I plan to take care of it separately.


I had the surgery this past March, so it has now been more than six months. I have a body type with a lot of upper arm fat, so no matter how much I dieted only my torso got thin, and I was stressed a lot because my clothes never fit the way I wanted. After the surgery the sleeves are loose, so I wear things comfortably^^ Friends often compliment me too, saying my arms have slimmed down a lot~


I had the surgery on December 3rd last year and it has been six months. Now it is so natural that I almost wonder whether I really had fat grafting, and I can hardly remember the hollow cheeks and the dull, tired-looking face I used to have, because the graft has settled in so well. These days I go around with a much brighter, livelier face~~ I am in my late 50s now, and I am thinking of doing it once more before I turn 60 That is how satisfied I am, and I think it is because I remember the surgery going so well without pain~~ Thank you, Dr. Yoosuk Chung~~^^


It has already been a month since my arm liposuction. Right after surgery there was a lot of swelling and the line was hard to see, so there were moments when I wondered if this was right, but now that about a month has passed there is definitely a visible change! My arms changed so clearly that people around me often ask if I lost weight, and the upper arm line especially got smoother, so in clothes I look much slimmer! In photos my arms look far thinner than before Overall, at the one-month mark, I am satisfied!


It has been about a month since my arm liposuction and breast fat grafting! Right after surgery there was of course some bruising and swelling, but now it is almost all gone and my arm line has really changed a lot!! I used to be self-conscious about my upper arms whenever I wore short sleeves or fitted clothes, but now every time I look in the mirror I can feel how much smoother they are! My chest got natural volume too, and I hope it stays just like this haha And the best part of all was the aftercare! I had aftercare twice in total, and the staff were really kind, and the pressure and temperature were just right, so it felt great every time:) I hear the swelling keeps going down until the six-month mark, so I am really looking forward to it


It has already been three months since my arm, upper arm root, and axillary breast tissue liposuction. Up to the one-month mark I thought there was no change in how I looked because of the bruising and swelling, but as time passed I could clearly feel the line getting cleaner. The fat at the back of my arms and near my armpits was cleaned up, so there is an obvious difference when I wear a tank top!! I used to feel awkward wearing tank tops, but these days I have the confidence, so my style options got wider hehe so happy.. I recommend it hehe!!


It has been six months since my facial liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung I had my cheeks, jawline, and double chin area suctioned! At six months the swelling seems almost gone, and everyone who sees me asks if I dieted and says I lost a lot of weight and look better~ The double chin is gone and I have a jawline now, so I love it They say people are never satisfied, I have already forgotten how I looked at first and want to lose a bit more from here hehe so I am going to diet too!!


I was so stressed about how uneven my thighs were after liposuction. With liposuction, getting slimmer matters, but the line matters just as much, right? Clinic reviews mattered to me, but I decided on revision surgery after hearing about the doctor's skill. TheLINE is famous for stem cell surgery, and Dr. Jaeho Cho's fat grafting experience and his skill at shaping the line are truly excellent. The unevenness that stressed me the most is gone and the line has become so smooth!! He also recommended Chanel line liposuction during the consultation to make my legs look even slimmer, and I really think I did well to trust him and go ahead with it!! Thank you so much for these pretty leg lines!!


It has already been six months since my arm + back root liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho! My arms have a bit more muscle than fat, so the doctor told me honestly from the start that extremely bony arms would be hard to get, and I also wanted a line that looks natural and pretty on my body rather than extremely thin arms, and his honest answer made me trust him more, so I went with TheLINE!! ha Early on, up to about the three-month mark, it was before summer so I worked out and managed my weight and kept the line nicely, and my wish was to wear the tank tops and tube tops this summer that I could never wear before, and I wore lots of pretty clothes, took lots of photos hehe and got to do it all hehe These days I have not been exercising or watching my diet, so my weight went up a little and other places gained, but maybe because of the liposuction, my arms barely gained anything I am still 100% satisfied with the surgery hehe


I had abdominal liposuction along with an abdominoplasty and love handle liposuction. Maybe thanks to the stem cells, the scars healed faster than I expected, and the sagging belly I was worried about improved a lot, so I am satisfied. I had lost more than 5kg after the surgery... but I overdid it in PT and ended up with a cast on my knee, so I could not move properly for two whole months... I gained a little back, but the line is holding, so I do not think it shows much. I want to recover soon and get back to taking care of myself~~ haha


It has been six months since my thigh, Chanel line, and hip fat grafting~! I think it has completely settled now Just when I thought all the swelling was gone, more would be gone the next time I looked, and now it really feels final! I just have to take care of myself to keep it this way!!


Posting my one-month review of arm and axillary breast tissue liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho! There is still a knotted feeling in the muscle, but it is loosening up and my arms are getting slimmer. I am dieting alongside it, so I think they will get a bit thinner. The bulging part is gone, so my clothes definitely fit differently. The scars are hard to see unless I open my arms, so I am satisfied!!


It has already been six months since my liposuction. At first I had a hard time with the bruising and swelling, but now it looks almost as natural as before the surgery. The arm liposuction area is so clean that the scars are not visible at all, and about 30% of the marks are still left on my abdomen, but the redness is completely gone!! Now the overall line is much cleaner, so my clothes fit much better than before:) The firmness of my abdomen is not much different from before either, so I think it would look natural to anyone haha I was a bit scared and had a lot of worries at first, but now I am satisfied with no regrets! Even though the weather is getting colder and I will be bundling up, I want to keep taking care of myself so the line I built stays the same. I am still keeping up with massage and light exercise! It is a process that gets prettier as time goes on, so I am looking forward to what comes next~~!!


It has already been half a year since the surgery. Time really flies. At first I was skeptical, wondering ‘will this really last?’, but now I feel proud every time I look in the mirror. At six months the line definitely feels completely settled. Up to the three-month mark there was slight swelling and tightness, but now my skin is much softer and more natural. When I touch it there is almost no odd sensation, and my whole abdomen feels firmer than before. Honestly, I binge-ate for a while because of stress and gained about 3kg, but these days I am exercising steadily and taking that weight off bit by bit. Interestingly, when I exercise the abdominal line gets even cleaner, and I can really feel my waistline getting much slimmer. The areas I had liposuction on definitely do not gain fat as easily as before, and exercise seems to show results faster too. Most of all, my clothes look different on me. When I tuck in a shirt my abdomen is flat so the fit is much cleaner, and I gained confidence too. Looking back now, I think it was really a good decision. Thanks to Dr. Jaeho Cho the unnecessary fat was cleaned up neatly, and the stress I had about my body has gone down a lot. Now I want to build up muscle lines through exercise and finish it off as a ‘well-managed body’.


It has been three months since my abdomen + love handles + thigh saddlebags + upper arm liposuction and hip dip fat grafting! The pain is almost gone and only a bit of firm residual swelling is left! The line has become much more natural, my lower belly is clearly flatter, and I got a waistline, so I can feel my pants fit differently! They say dieting alongside it makes the effect bigger, but working full time made it hard, so I did not really commit to a diet, I just ate a bit less and walked a lot more, and the swelling definitely went down better! The line feels much cleaner!! Also, now that my upper arms are slimmer, I have the confidence to wear short sleeves and tank tops. I am tall so I look bigger built, but with thinner arms I look much slimmer! The surgical areas are still not completely soft, so I massage regularly and go to an aftercare shop! It was hard early on, but around the three-month mark the swelling went down a lot and the line settled, so now I can really see that my body has changed! I still need to diet more and the line is not finished, but for now I am very satisfied! They say the swelling keeps going down until six months, so I am looking forward to it hehe


It has been a month since the surgery, and I have recovered enough that everyday movement is not much trouble anymore. Early on, the sharp pain every time I sat down or lay down made it hard to move freely, but now it feels so much lighter that the memory seems unreal. That said, wearing the compression garment constantly has made my skin dry and it often feels itchy or stingy. I think that is unavoidable to some degree, but I am managing it by applying moisturizer and body oil often. I also asked the clinic about rechecking the measurements they took when the compression garment was fitted - compared to the beginning, my abdomen has clearly come in a lot. They told me that as the swelling goes down the skin tightens more and the size shrinks further, so I am going to take care of it and wait! It has not fully settled yet, but seeing my body change little by little in the mirror every day makes me think my decision to have the surgery was not wrong. I will keep up with the remaining swelling care and the injection treatments, and post another review next month in a more settled state!


I decided on liposuction to fix my arm line, a long-standing worry. They said they removed 650cc of pure fat in total from my arms + upper arm roots + bra line + axillary breast tissue. A month later my circumference is down 0.7, the left axillary breast tissue has shrunk a little, and the right side looks cleanly removed. Overall the line is much tidier and the bulge at the back is gone. They said it will get thinner as the swelling goes down, so I am going to wait until the three-month mark. I chose to have surgery at TheLINE because of the emphasis on safety and because they use stem cells during the liposuction stage. It cost more than I had expected so I hesitated, but since it is surgery I felt safety and recovery mattered more. The reception and operating room staff are very kind, and Dr. Baek explains things in detail so the patient can feel at ease. The fact that there is a separate consultation fee was actually better from a patient's point of view, since I could ask questions comfortably without feeling awkward. I was very nervous on the day of surgery, but the operating room staff kept reassuring me, so I got through the anesthesia and onto the table safely. Aftercare is provided free twice. For my first session I had cryotherapy (3 minutes), the kind athletes get when they recover, and it helped a lot with pain relief. The doctor said aftercare has no effect at all on the surgical result, but I still feel more swelling needs to come down, so on top of the two clinic aftercare sessions I started weekly radiofrequency care outside. I am dieting alongside it too, and I hope the rest of the swelling goes down soon so I can show off my arm line!


I am one month out from abdomen and love handle liposuction After about a month the swelling has gone down a lot and the line has become natural, and maybe thanks to the procedure using stem cells, recovery feels a bit faster. There is still a little stiffness, but no real problem with daily life, and I am recovering smoothly while following the care instructions from the clinic. So far I am very satisfied overall.


It has already been six months since my upper arm + axillary breast tissue + surrounding arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek! Time really flies hehe Right after surgery there was swelling and bruising, but from the one-month mark recovery went fast, and around two to three months the arm line really came out, and now it is completely settled!! The residual swelling is almost all gone now, so the line has settled naturally and smoothly! Even though I gained a lot of weight after the surgery my arms are thinner overall, and the axillary breast area and the back of my arms especially lost fat, so the whole silhouette of my arms got so pretty I used to be really self-conscious about my upper arms in short sleeves, but now I can wear sleeveless tops~ hehe Recovery was fast and the scars are barely visible, so unless I say I had surgery, no one would know hehe I am really satisfied with what Dr. Jungjae Baek did ♥


It has been six months since my abdominal liposuction + hip dip grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim. The surgical scars have faded a lot in color.. and compared to before the surgery I am satisfied with my love handles, waistline, and front abdomen when I wear clothes!! I ate a lot over the Chuseok holiday.. so I am swollen and gained a little, but the areas I had surgery on still do not gain much and the side line is the same, so overall it is good~!! After the surgery I lost about 5kg.. and losing some weight brings out the contour more, so the line looks much prettier.. the synergy is good!! I will post another review next time~


It has been just over a month since my arm liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. At first I came in for a consultation just hoping to lose a little arm fat, but now I really think I did well to do it. Every time I put on short sleeves or other clothes, the clearly different arm line gives me confidence, and I feel proud every time I look in the mirror. Overall I have a slim build, but my upper arms stood out, and it stressed me that my arms looked chubby in every photo. I worked out steadily to lose the upper arm fat, but my arms just would not slim down. After that, talking with the consultant and the doctor, they walked me through the whole recovery care process and everything related to the surgery in an organized way, so I could decide on surgery with peace of mind. Right after surgery my arms felt heavy and there was a little swelling, but it was much more bearable than I had expected, and I went about my life wearing the compression garment. From the next day I could move my arms slowly and do light daily activities. The first week there was stiffness when I raised my arms, but from the second week the swelling clearly started to go down. The bruising faded a lot, the inner arms gradually got smoother, and I could see the line changing in the mirror. In short sleeves the upper arm line was clearly different, and only slight soreness was left when pressed. Now that a month has passed the swelling is almost all gone and the arm line has become really natural. The parts that were tight and hard at first are soft now, my arm circumference is much smaller than before the surgery, and it looks far more natural. And above all, I can see my clothes hang much more neatly. Thanks to the kind consultant and the doctor I recovered well over the month without much discomfort, and I plan to keep taking care of myself and maintain this pretty arm line. Seeing the upper arm fat that exercise never touched disappear and a smooth line come out as the swelling went down, I honestly think I did well to do it. ????


I had full-body liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho~! I had my arms, abdomen, and thighs suctioned and fat grafted to my buttocks What convinced me was that he said he would make it as pretty as possible within a safe range with no risk of side effects, and there really were no side effects at all and no unevenness at all hehe My body line changed completely, so this summer I got to wear fitted and revealing clothes as much as I wanted ♥


My skin is naturally soft and sags easily, so I worried a lot about firmness after the surgery. But once I actually recovered, that worry turned out to be completely unnecessary! Recovery definitely feels much faster, probably because it is stem cell liposuction. Compared to when I had liposuction at another clinic a few years ago, this time I can clearly feel my body recovering much faster. Right now there is a little firmness around the axillary breast area, but it is only one month in, so I think of it as a natural part of the process. There is almost no pain, at most a slight ‘rubbing’ sensation deeper in when I rub the skin. Even that is fading, so I feel recovery is going well. The major swelling has gone down a lot now, so I can see the line is cleaner, and the flesh that used to hang down when I raised my arms is much less. Seeing the result with my own eyes makes me so happy. Before the surgery the consultant told me “dieting alongside it helps the line settle even more prettily”... only now do I realize how important that is. From now on I am going to manage my diet and exercise and take even better care of it!


It has been about a month since the surgery, and the bruises are completely gone. The swelling has visibly gone down too, maybe about 60-70% at this point. There is almost no pain, just a slight pulling feeling when I raise my arms. Daily life is completely fine, and I do light exercise and stretching comfortably. I can clearly see the arm line is cleaner. When I wear short sleeves or sleeveless tops the fit is much neater than before, and to anyone it just looks like I naturally lost weight. There is no sign at all that I had surgery, it is as natural as if my arms had always looked like this! A friend I had not seen in a while asked if I lost weight, which made me proud hehe They say the line gets even smoother once the rest of the swelling goes down, so I am satisfied already but looking forward to it getting even better!


It has been a month since my surgery with Dr. Yoongeun Kim It was a revision of abdominal liposuction, and since the sides done at another clinic were asymmetric, I also had fat grafting to the over-suctioned parts of my abdomen to even things out And I had breast fat grafting at the same time The shape of my abdomen is much more natural than before and the sides seem well balanced now Just as the doctor explained at the consultation, my chest has stayed at about the size it gets before my period, and the graft seems to have taken well I had my arms, thighs, and hip grafting done with Dr. Kim in January and was satisfied, so I came back to TheLINE this time too, and recovery was fast and it looks so natural that I am very satisfied


It has already been three months since my liposuction! I had upper arm liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE Plastic Surgery. Before the surgery, honestly, I was so stressed every time I got dressed because of my upper arms. In photos I would hide my arms behind my body or try hard to avoid side angles. Especially in summer, even in short sleeves I would put on a jacket despite the heat because of my arms. So I looked into a lot of clinics, read reviews carefully, and went to several consultations in person. Among them, TheLINE Plastic Surgery felt trustworthy right from the consultation. Dr. Jaeho Cho looked at the condition of my arms very carefully and said it is not simply about removing fat, but that shaping the line nicely is what matters, and that completely convinced me. I thought, ‘this is not just losing fat, this is design.’ On the day of surgery I was honestly a bit nervous, but the nurses took such kind care of me that instead of worry I felt more excitement, thinking ‘I am finally going to be free of these arms.’ The first day after surgery there was slight swelling and bruising, and wearing the compression garment was a bit uncomfortable. But everyone goes through this, so I braced myself and wore it diligently. Wearing the compression garment consistently definitely made the swelling go down much faster. After about a month my arms gradually got softer and the bruising was almost all gone. From then on the change really started to show. The flesh that used to spread out to the side when I held my arms against my body disappeared, and my arm line got much slimmer, so I was so happy every time I looked in the mirror ???? With thinner upper arms my T-shirts fit completely differently, and blouse sleeves that used to catch right at my shoulders now go on with room to spare! Now I am three months out, the swelling is almost all gone and my skin has settled softly. Taking care of it with exercise, my arm line is getting firmer and firmer. Sometimes friends ask “did you lose weight?”, but my weight is actually almost the same and because the arm line changed, a lot of people say I look much slimmer overall. Every time, I say to myself ‘thank you, Dr. Jaeho Cho...’ hehe What is good about TheLINE Plastic Surgery is that they take detailed care of you after surgery too. They check my condition regularly, and if anything feels off I can consult right away, so I felt secure throughout the recovery period. Arms move a lot, so recovery matters, right? The doctor explained that in advance and went over the aftercare methods thoroughly, so I was able to recover without any major problems. Now I have so much more confidence than before. I used to hate having my photo taken because of my arms, but these days I put on short sleeves on purpose and take selfies hehe The line is pretty and the whole arm falls smoothly, so I am 100% satisfied. Honestly I wonder why I did not do it sooner!! hehe


It has already been six months since my upper arm and axillary breast tissue procedure! Early on the bruising and pain made the first one to two weeks a bit uncomfortable, but after that there was no real problem with daily life :) The clinic said residual swelling goes down until six months, and now it feels like the swelling is almost all gone! Even though I gained some weight in between, the line is holding, so I am not stressed like I used to be, and that is honestly the biggest change The axillary breast tissue was cleaned up neatly too, and I applied the ointment diligently and cared for the scars, so they faded a lot. And one tip I would share, getting upper arm liposuction during long-sleeve season is really great! It is about time to start wearing long sleeves, so if you are thinking about it, I recommend this time of year!!


It has already been three months since the surgery! I had thigh, knee, and lower belly liposuction along with fat grafting to my hips. After two months the thigh swelling went down a lot. Before the surgery my thigh circumference was 53cm, and now it is down to about 47cm. The fat around my knees was cleaned up too so my legs look much longer, and the overall line is much smoother. The grafted hip area was a bit uneven until the one-month mark, but at three months it became natural as the thigh swelling went down along with it. I started Pilates at the one-month mark, and early on it was uncomfortable because of pain during the movements where my hips pressed against the floor. But around the two-month mark it was fine, and no fat has collapsed anywhere, so I am keeping it up! With the hip line defined, my clothes really fit differently. I often wear leggings and jeans I never used to wear, and overall my satisfaction is really high!


Using my arms is not hard at all now and I wear fitted clothes whenever I want, which I love. Since the sutures came out the swelling seems to keep going down, so I am happy every time I look! There is still a tingling feeling when I press my arms or raise them high, but that is getting better bit by bit, and maybe because I keep applying the ointment, the scars do not bother me that much! The suturing was so neat that you cannot even see it from a distance, so good. I want to get my aftercare soon and have more swelling go down so I can wear even more pretty clothes hehe If you are thinking about a lift, do it at TheLINE!!!


It has already been three months since my stem cell arm, abdomen, and love handle liposuction and buttock and hip fat grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim. The swelling has gone down a lot, and the stiffness and hard spots I felt a little early on have completely loosened up, so not just the line but even the texture feels natural. I am satisfied with every area I had done, but these days the abdomen and love handle areas make me happiest. Compared to before the surgery my waistline is nicely defined, and the line looks so pretty in workout clothes and fitted clothes. Rather than looking scrawny it is a firm, tidy line, so I look healthy and my clothes look much better too! I tried on the same workout outfit as before the surgery and my waist and hip lines were so different that I wondered whether that was really me before hehe For the upper arms I had the area from behind the armpit to where the arm starts done as well, so the heavy look from behind is definitely gone. Overall I am very satisfied, and as my figure got prettier I started exercising harder too, which gave me more energy in daily life. I originally had a lot of worries about side effects and scars with liposuction, but the doctor's expertise in stem cells and that whole side of things felt trustworthy, which is why I decided on the surgery. I think I did well to trust the doctor, and maybe thanks to the stem cells my skin firmness improved too, so it feels like a bonus hehe They say the swelling keeps going down until six months, so I will post another review once I look different again.


I had abdomen and love handle liposuction with Dr. Yoongeun Kim seven months ago! Before the surgery I had a lot of worries because the fat on my belly and sides would not go away even with exercise. But Dr. Yoongeun Kim analyzed my body shape and made a smooth line without disturbing the balance of my body. Right after surgery there was bruising and swelling, but it gradually went down and now the line has settled without a single bruise or any swelling. My waistline got slimmer and my whole silhouette is sleeker hehe My belly used to stick out so my clothes never looked right, but now clothes fit well and my body line shows nicely, so I gained confidence hehe Now that my body shape has changed I feel more satisfied every time I take a photo ♥♥


It has already been three months since my full-body liposuction + grafting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. I had liposuction on my arms, abdomen, back line, thighs, and knees, and fat grafted to my hips. At first there was swelling and pain so I was worried, but as time passed I recovered naturally. I can see the line settling more and more, so I am very satisfied. I used to be very self-conscious about my body shape when getting dressed, but now the line is smooth so I have gained confidence. The inner thighs and abdomen especially were hard to slim down with exercise, but there was a noticeable change after the surgery, so I feel really proud. People around me tell me I lost a lot of weight and my figure got prettier, which makes me happy. My skin firmness is coming back compared to right after surgery, and these days I feel the line getting cleaner as I exercise alongside it. The surgical scars are fading with time as well, so there is no real inconvenience in daily life. Of course there were anxious moments during recovery, but the doctor and the consultant checked on me carefully and guided me, so I could feel at ease. Now my whole body line is balanced and I feel the weight loss effect too, so I really think deciding on the surgery was a good choice. I want to keep maintaining it well so this state lasts longer. To anyone considering full-body liposuction, I would say it is a surgery you can be fully satisfied with as long as you recover well.


Posting my review after thigh liposuction and buttock fat grafting! When I decide on surgery I look at a lot of review photos and shop around in person, and while looking into thigh liposuction and buttock fat grafting I learned about stem cell liposuction and thought grafting with stem cells would be better, so I had the surgery! They said surgery using stem cells means faster recovery and better graft take, so I chose TheLINE Plastic Surgery, booked on the day of my consultation, and had the surgery the very next day! Before the surgery I was stressed about how uneven my thighs got as I gained weight, but at the one-month mark I could see the line was cleaner, so I love it! They say the swelling goes down more over time, so I am really looking forward to it Having the buttock fat grafting at the same time made my waist look more defined even though I did not touch my waist hehe If you are thinking about liposuction, do the hip and buttock fat grafting together! The line will be different


After about three weeks the bruising was almost gone and I recovered quickly with no trouble in daily life, which was nice. I had my consultation and surgery with Dr. Yoongeun Kim, and he was so kind and thorough from the consultation on that I could trust him and go into surgery comfortably. The back bulge and side bulge that bothered me most are getting closer to a straight line, so I am satisfied. Since the suture removal the swelling has gone down quickly, so I think I can get even better results if I diet alongside it^^ I am satisfied!


After succeeding at a diet long ago, I stayed heavy after COVID, and one day I realized I was back up to going between 78 and 81 It took two months to barely get down to 73, and when I checked my figure, I always carried weight on my upper body, but my back especially folded twice and I looked so big that I looked into liposuction and had the surgery! I had my arms, abdomen, bra line, and love handles done with Dr. Jungjae Baek Since it was a revision I went around to many clinics, and I could sense which places felt commercial and which did not, and I weighed safety, line, suction volume, experience, price and so on, and decided on TheLINE for full upper body liposuction Also, compared to clinics that just say they can take it all out, the realistic explanations resonated with me more hehe Right after surgery, because of the fluid and the swelling, I went up to 81, and on the eighth day I weighed 72.7kg Recovery was fast within a week and I could see the bruising fading a lot And now at one month! My weight is down to 69, and what I feel directly is that my overall body size has shrunk As I remember they told me about 2100 was removed, and 2kg dropped off my original weight, so maybe that is what it was hehe I can clearly feel the subcutaneous fat is gone when I touch my body, and the thickness of the fold on my back that bothered me is different too They said it keeps going down at three and six months, and I have visceral fat as well, so I think it will keep decreasing if I manage my diet too!


It has been six months since my liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho. When I looked into clinics I focused on the doctor's career. You all know, right? The difference between a small clinic and a hospital! Of course, if they have plenty of experience a small clinic is not bad either, but I weighed both experience and training and went to a hospital. It cost accordingly, but minimizing side effects mattered most to me. In return, I think they do the surgery that much more safely. The feeling that they do not take out too much?! So there are fewer side effects, and at first I did not like that, but six months on I thought, ah~ not bad at all! I have not had it done at another clinic so I would not know, but aftercare was twice and there was nothing like biobond. Of course it is there at first, but it disappears really quickly, and the pain after surgery was truly only 2-3 days, and I could go about my activities right away. It is surgery, so of course there is mild soreness for a few days. I had the front of my abdomen done first, and then my love handles and back three months later. My belly is still slim when I flex and it sticks out when I relax. But the flab is not there like before. I used to be able to grab a handful of fat, and now there is none of that. I am not on a strict diet to keep the weight off, but I eat moderately and maintain it well, and I exercise too For fat that will not come off, I really think liposuction is the answer. I do not know what other clinics are like, but if you are worried about biobond or side effects, I highly recommend here. As for scars, there are two in front and one in back, and the one in back is not visible at all, and the two in front are only visible when showering somewhere public like a sauna, but no one is going to stare only there, so it does not bother me. They have faded a lot compared to before, and I think a little will remain over time, but they seem to keep fading. It is nice not to worry about getting dressed the way I used to.


Hello Three months have already passed since I had axillary breast gland removal, an armpit lift, and arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek. I am living so happily these days that all the time I spent worrying and hesitating feels pointless. The menstrual pain I used to suffer from has eased, and my sagging arms look so much better that I wonder why I worried, so I am grateful to Dr. Jungjae Baek. Thank you^^


It has been a year since my surgery with Dr. Jungjae Baek! To start with the conclusion, I am really satisfied. As time passed the line settled more and more, and now it is really natural and pretty. My waist and abdomen especially got clearly slimmer, so my clothes look completely different on me. Before the surgery I worried about coming out uneven or looking wavy, but the line never came out uneven or strange at all, and the clinic took good care of me afterward so recovery was easy. From the consultation to the surgery and the aftercare, I was satisfied overall. They explained everything in great detail at the consultation too, so if you are hesitating, just getting a consultation should help you get your bearings. If I had to choose again I would go with TheLINE! hehe


It has been a month since my arm, axillary breast tissue, and arm root liposuction~ From the front I can feel the volume is reduced, and the part that stuck out to the side is clearly smaller! And I am so glad I did the axillary breast tissue at the same time, because now that it is gone I can wear sleeveless tops Definitely do the axillary breast tissue together hehe My satisfaction with how clothes look went way up There is a bit of biobond around my armpits, but along with the scars it is in a place others cannot see, so I am fine with it Overall recovery was fast and the scars are small, so I am very satisfied It is only one month and they say more swelling will go down, so I am looking forward to it~


I am grateful that I have far less biobond than people who had it done elsewhere I did not have much bruising either, but the aesthetician who takes care of me kept saying it was because the doctor at the clinic really paid attention She said many people still have bad bruising and biobond even after time passes I had abdomen and love handle liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek, and my belly fat is noticeably gone so I am very satisfied Once again I thought I really did get it done at a good place~ Still, to keep it up I am working hard on my diet and exercise and taking care of myself!


It has already been six months since my stem cell abdominal liposuction + hip dip fat grafting hehe Compared to before the surgery I am still very satisfied with my waistline, love handles, and front abdomen I have gained more weight recently, but the areas I had surgery on do not gain much and the side line is still there, so I love it The surgical scars are fading in color too I could not go in for a follow-up because I had no time, but this time I really should go!


I had stem cell arm liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung~ I had it done 360 degrees and it has been about a month now The swelling is still going down, so even at one month I can feel it keep changing The consultant said to give it up to three months, so I am looking forward to it The line feels cleaner and the side bulge when I lower my arms has gone down a lot


I used to avoid short sleeves and sleeveless tops because of my upper arms, but now my arms are clearly slimmer and my clothes look completely different. I really felt the difference wearing spring and summer clothes. At the 6-month mark it looks like I lost weight naturally, and there is barely any unevenness or scarring, which I love. Now that my upper arm line is cleaned up, I look smaller even though my weight is about the same!


I had my thighs, Chanel line liposuction and hip dip grafting done by Dr. Joongjae Baek! At around 3 months I am noticeably slimmer! These days I wear nothing but shorts, and everyone around me keeps asking how I lost so much weight.. (my upper body actually gained some) I am so happy with the area under my buttocks and my knees. I used to think liposuction was too expensive, so I spent over 3 million won on fat-dissolving injections first, but they barely did anything and I felt like I had wasted the money. Going straight for liposuction really does save both money and time. All that time I spent hesitating feels pointless now ..!! If you are torn, just go for it.


Hello! It has already been 3 months since my upper arm and accessory breast liposuction, so I am leaving a review! Before surgery I had no confidence even in short sleeves, so I only wore the boxiest tops, but now I look for slim-fit tees only! Early on the bruising and swelling were obvious, but after about a month the line really came through! Now the swelling is almost gone and everything has settled in naturally. With no flesh spreading out to the sides when I put my arms down, my upper body looks much slimmer and my clothes fit differently! The reactions around me are amazing too, haha. My friends keep saying things like did you go on a diet? Haven't you lost too much weight? Shouldn't you stop dieting? I hear that all the time, haha. It is really just the liposuction, haha. I heard it takes about 6 months for the line to look completely natural, so I will keep taking care of myself and watching it! If you are worried about your upper arms, I really really recommend liposuction!!!!


Some time has passed since my breast fat grafting, and the scars keep fading. Up close you can still see them, but they are far less noticeable than before, so I hardly think about it. My weight fluctuates a lot, but maybe thanks to the stem cells, the volume has held up without shrinking or collapsing, and I am happy with that. The texture is really soft and natural, so it feels just like my own body, and my bra size went up a cup, so I feel good every time I look in the mirror, haha. I expect the scars to fade further and the shape to look even more natural as more time passes, so I am looking forward to it!


I had 360-degree abdomen, love handles, the Y zone, thighs (saddlebags and inner), and knee liposuction together with buttock fat grafting There were a lot of areas and I had heard plenty about liposuction side effects, so I was worried, but after my consultation with Dr. Yoosuk Chung and hearing about the stem cells and the surgical method, I felt reassured And in fact I had no side effects at all - no sagging, no unevenness, no inflammation! Barely any bruising either I did gain a little weight at one point, but since liposuction had set the line, that weight never showed the way it used to People around me didn't even notice I had gained... haha With the line in place, the same weight looks much slimmer Also the areas I had suctioned don't gain much - it is more like the gaining slows down.. I only put it on in places I didn't have surgery, like my upper arms and double chin, haha After that I took care of myself again and the line came right back, and these days I wear low-rise jeans and white tees a lot Everyone asks if I do glute workouts, and when I say no they envy me for being born with it Looking back I was very worried before surgery, but thanks to my doctor's work I now live with a body I feel confident in It really is one of the best decisions of my life!!!


It has already been 3 months since my arm and accessory breast liposuction plus arm lift at TheLINE! Up to the 2-month mark there was a constant pulling and stiff feeling when I moved my arms, but at 3 months that tightness has clearly eased. Once in a while, if I stretch big or lift something heavy, I feel a slight pull, but there is no inconvenience in daily life at all! The scars are still visible, but I keep applying the ointment and I can see them fading...! Even when I press my arms all the way to my sides there is no excess flesh, just a smooth line, so I feel great every time I look in the mirror. I was told it needs a bit more time to fully settle, so I am keeping up with the care. I really think I made the right choice! My goal now is for the scars to fade further and look completely natural, so I keep up with stretching and rehab exercises. Even right after surgery it was amazing how the loose flesh under my arms was gone, and my satisfaction has only shot up as time passes!


It is 6 months since my arm and accessory breast surgery! After surgery my arms got so much thinner and the line got prettier, and that became a big motivator Over 6 months I also lost about 5 kg, which really maximized the surgical result They also released the trapezius muscle line at the same time, so the arm line is even more perfect, haha Thank you so much Dr. Yoosuk Chung for such beautiful work!!


I had liposuction on my arms, accessory breast tissue and down under the armpits! I consulted Dr. Joongjae Baek and had the surgery with him, and I was surprised that the swelling and bruising were not severe Now at 6 months, the flesh that used to bulge out to the sides is gone and everything looks neatly shaped It has settled in stably and I go around looking like someone who lost weight nicely, haha I keep up with exercise and my diet as well so I am managing myself more healthily, and I am glad I had the procedure!


It has already been 4 months since Dr. Jaeho Cho, Chief Director, did my arm and accessory breast liposuction. The line is clearly cleaned up and my clothes fit much more naturally, so I am happy. I could see the swelling going down right after surgery, but just as my doctor said, adding exercise makes the residual swelling go down faster and the result show better. These days I keep up with Pilates and I am even working on my posture, and because I had the liposuction the changes show up clearly, which I am really glad about. In the past I would exercise and barely see a difference, but now even small changes are visible, so it motivates me more. The line keeps settling in more naturally as time goes by, so I am very satisfied :)


I have finally hit 3 months after surgery! Recovery was fast and it settled in without any unevenness, so I can barely remember what I used to look like, haha My clothes look better and better as it settles, so I am happy every time I look in the mirror. My belly fat and the extra flesh on my sides came off with good firmness too, so I am very satisfied. I had abdomen, love handle and thigh liposuction along with buttock fat grafting It was probably just post-op swelling, but I liked that Kardashian(?) volume back then too,, so these days the thought 'should I get one more touch-up?' crosses my mind, haha Human greed really has no end, haha The scars keep fading and now I can exercise with peace of mind, so I plan to refine things a bit more alongside working out!


I had fat taken from my abdomen, love handles and saddlebags and grafted into my buttocks! My line changed, so this summer I could finally wear everything I wanted to wear My flat hips got filled in just the right amount and my pelvis got a bit wider, so it looks like a textbook slender hip, and I love it I would have found something too excessive a bit much Thanks to it I even wore a bikini for the first time in my life My boyfriend was against the surgery, asking why I would do such a thing, but now I think he likes it even more than I do, haha


It is my third month since the arm lift At 3 months there is no real pain or inconvenience in daily life, and I am doing light exercise like the stationary bike and easy swimming! Dumbbells, the gym and upper-body strength training still feel like too much, so I stick to light workouts If I overdo physical activity during the day I feel a bit of warmth in my arms, but I have gotten used to that too, and a cold pack takes care of it It feels like the swelling is nearly all gone, and a lot of the flesh that used to hang down is gone compared with before surgery, so I am happy, haha


It has already been 3 months since Dr. Jaeho Cho did my arm liposuction I liked the result early on, but now the swelling has gone down even more and my arms are thinner, which I love Long sleeves are coming soon and I think I can wear tight knits without worrying about my upper arms, so I am looking forward to it Now I will diet a little and take better care of myself so I do not gain weight again. I highly recommend arm liposuction!


It has already been 3 months since my arm liposuction~ These days I am very happy looking at my arms, so much thinner than before, haha I almost regret not doing it sooner.. haha No matter how much I dieted my arms never slimmed down, so if I diet on top of this I think they will get even thinner ^^ The parts that used to stick out are much more cleaned up now, haha Looking at my photos from before the liposuction is honestly shocking, haha If you are getting arm liposuction, I highly recommend TheLINE Plastic Surgery!


At 6 months the swelling and bruising are almost entirely gone and my abdominal line is smooth. With the flesh on my sides gone, my clothes look cleaner too. I am so glad I did the abdomen and love handles together. I wear fitted tops and crop tees with more confidence than before. My pants size dropped by one as well. With a slimmer waistline my overall proportions seem better too, haha The line across the back of the waist is hard to slim down with dieting, but that came off too, and now I can wear waist-baring clothes without a second thought, which I love. People around me often tell me I lost weight ^^


It has already been 3 months since my arm and accessory breast liposuction, and by now the swelling is almost completely gone and I can see how much the contour of my arms has been cleaned up. It was only after someone told me my back view looks noticeably sleeker that I thought 'ah, it really did change.' Being told I look smaller was the best part! Thanks to the stem cell liposuction Dr. Jaeho Cho performed, recovery was not hard at all and I had zero side effects, which is great


It has been about 3 months since my procedure, and I had upper arm and accessory breast liposuction together~ Before surgery my accessory breast tissue spilled over my bra line enough to affect how my clothes looked, and the side of my arm bulged out roundly, so I was always worried about covering it up Right after surgery there was bruising, but it was almost gone after about 2 weeks, and the swelling gradually went down as I kept wearing the compression garment. Recovery went smoothly without any particular side effects, so daily life was not much of a problem. Now that 3 months have passed, the change is clearly visible. With the accessory breast tissue cleaned up, the thing that used to bother me when wearing tops is gone, and my arm line looks much neater. I can feel for myself that my clothes look different overall, and people around me often say my appearance looks softer. It was a procedure I decided on after a long time thinking it over, and now I feel at ease that I chose well.


It has already been 6 months since surgery. At first I hesitated a lot because people said liposuction side effects are serious, I worried about recovery, and I doubted whether I would get the change I wanted, but now that half a year has passed I can clearly feel that I am different from before. The scars have faded so much that unless I tell people myself, nobody notices at all. They are barely visible, so that put my mind at ease. I had liposuction on my arms, accessory breast tissue, abdomen, love handles, thighs and knees plus hip fat grafting, and since I can see how the lines of my thighs, sides and lower belly have been cleaned up, even the style of clothes I wear has changed. Before surgery I spent a lot of time trying this and that to lose weight and it stressed me out, so I think I should have just had the liposuction a little earlier. These days I really feel how important exercise is, because keeping the line the surgery created ultimately depends on lifestyle habits. So whenever I have the energy I try to move even a little. Exercise used to be simply a means to lose weight, but after surgery it feels like a process for keeping my body beautiful and healthy. It is interesting how my mindset changed, and I like that my thinking is different now. So sometimes I feel a bit sorry that I did not do it when I was even a year younger, but even so, finding the courage to have the surgery at this point in my life turned out to be the biggest gift I could give myself. When your body changes, your mindset changes too, and you naturally start wanting to take better care of yourself. If I keep managing myself and exercising, the line will settle in even more naturally and stably, right?


It has been 6 months since my full arm, back and abdomen liposuction I did a lot of digging and went with Dr. Joongjae Baek First of all, everyone who sees me keeps asking how I got so slim and telling me I lost a lot of weight! Since the arm liposuction I was able to confidently wear nothing but sleeveless tops all through this hot summer, which was so good My abdomen too - pants that used to be small now fit, so I love it Most of all I am happiest that my line got prettier After doing my abdomen I am so satisfied that I want to do my thighs too! The short-term result is good so shopping for clothes is fun. I used to stress about only buying clothes that hid my arms and belly, but now I do not have to think about that, so shopping is much easier These days I have started exercising on my own, doing Pilates and such, and I pay much more attention to maintenance! They say maintenance matters most, so I will stay on top of it without getting complacent!


It has been 6 months since my abdominoplasty for the skin sagging below my navel after dieting. Dr. Jaeho Cho performed the surgery, and when I searched he had a lot of experience with lift surgeries maybe that is why his consultation was concise and easy to follow, I trusted him, so I had the surgery with Dr. Cho. The scar keeps getting fainter and there is not a single inconvenience now. Comparing before and after, it is clearly much cleaner, so I am satisfied with the surgery.


I had abdomen, love handle, thigh and knee liposuction plus buttock fat grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim~! At first I was worried because it felt like a big job with so many areas but my doctor consulted with me thoroughly and stressed safety, so I felt a bit more at ease Also, hip dips were a big complex of mine, so I really wanted the fat grafting done with stem cells Unless it is an implant, grafted fat can gradually reduce, but I heard stem cells help it take better! So I looked around and heard TheLINE is the most famous and the best with stem cells, so I visited They said both the liposuction and the grafting would use stem cells, that recovery is faster and side effects reduced, so I decided on the spot! If you look at the before and after photos you can see the line completely changed, and the graft settled in so well that it is like I never had hip dips The suctioned areas came out smooth without any dents, so I look like someone who dieted and worked out hard to build a nice body I like being toned, but I used to avoid strength training because I was afraid of building muscle in unflattering places Now I have a feminine, well-shaped body and I love it With the stem cells plus autologous blood transfusion, I felt surprisingly fine on the day of surgery once the anesthesia wore off, haha Recovery after that was really fast, haha. My friends who have had liposuction were all amazed.. Anyway, on my summer vacation I wore everything I wanted to wear and took pretty photos, and I was so, so happy It is all thanks to my doctor!!!


It has been about a month since my arm lift~! I had arm liposuction at the same time! It was quite uncomfortable early on, but after a week I could manage daily life to some extent, and after a month raising my arms comes very naturally! Other reviews mentioned the scar area stinging so I was worried, but my scar area does not hurt and feels fine! Also the scar did not turn very red? My doctor said that is because the suturing was done well, haha They say the swelling will go down a bit more from here and I am so excited, haha Even now my old clothes feel loose around the arms, so comfortable! I cannot wait to see my arms once the swelling is completely gone T_T!


It has already been 3 months since surgery! Dr. Joongjae Baek did my arm and accessory breast liposuction, and the result feels more definite as time goes by. At 1 month it was more like 'did it slim down a bit?', but now the arm line is completely cleaned up and everything from below the elbow up is smooth and light. These days short sleeves are a given, and I wear tank tops all the time. Especially since it is summer I go to the water a lot, and with the accessory breast line cleaned up I have no hesitation about wearing a bikini. When I take photos I no longer try to hide anything and can just pose confidently, haha Most of all I have gained a lot of confidence in life, and now I wear tank tops proudly!


It has already been 6 months since my surgery. At first I worried about how recovery would go, but now it feels completely settled into my body. The arm line has stabilized, there is no swelling or awkwardness left at all, and it naturally suits my body shape. I feel it most when I get dressed. In short sleeves or sleeveless tops my upper arms used to stand out and bother me, but now a trim line shows and I look much neater. It is less that they simply got thinner and more that the overall balance looks right, and that is what satisfies me. The scars have faded to the point of being nearly invisible, so nobody notices them now. I feel my consistent aftercare paid off. Best of all, the result revealed itself more and more naturally as time passed. Now I am confident that it is completely finished, and I am satisfied enough that all my hesitation feels pointless. If anyone is wavering like I was, I really want to say how important the time after surgery is. I feel like I only met the true final result at the 6-month mark.


It is 6 months since Dr. Yoongeun Kim did my abdomen and love handle liposuction! I was already happy right after surgery because a line appeared, and as time passed the swelling went down more and I took care of myself too, so now the line is exactly what I wanted, ta-da! Haha My lower belly used to stick out even when I lost weight, but that is gone now and I love it~ Now I just have to work hard on maintaining my weight!!


Posting my liposuction and fat grafting review~ In February Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my abdomen, love handle, thigh and knee liposuction along with breast and pelvis fat grafting About 6 months have passed now and I can feel that it has completely settled After surgery the excess is gone where it should be, and the hip dip area around my pelvis is filled in, so the overall line is nicely shaped My breasts got natural volume and the asymmetry was corrected, so I am very happy~ haha I had scars on both sides of my pelvis and near my tailbone, but they have faded so much they are hard to see now


I have already reached the 6-month mark~ Before surgery, no matter how much I exercised the fat on my arms never came off, so I was always stressed. My body type carries weight in the upper body, which made me look bulkier, and even in summer there were many days I hesitated over sleeveless or short-sleeved tops. After a really long time thinking it over I decided on arm liposuction, and now I want to tell myself I did the right thing. At 6 months the swelling is almost entirely gone and my skin is much softer. My upper arms used to be round and thick so my whole upper body looked heavy, but now my arms are slim with a firm, clean line and my overall silhouette has changed a lot I had a habit of keeping my arms away from my body in photos, but now they look natural and slim even pressed against my sides, so I do not think about it anymore. Especially in thin T-shirts or sleeveless tops, the fit is completely different from before, and getting dressed has become fun. I really realized this time how much the way clothes hang matters. Arm liposuction did not simply remove fat from my arms - for me it was a surgery that gave me confidence and a new lifestyle. Thank you so much, Dr. Joongjae Baek, for creating a natural and pretty line rather than something obviously overdone.


It has already been 6 months since Dr. Joongjae Baek did my upper body liposuction! I had stem cell liposuction on my whole upper body including arms, accessory breast tissue and abdomen, and now the swelling and bruising are of course all gone and the line has completely stabilized, so I am very happy! Right after surgery there was swelling and pain, but it settled quickly and personally it was bearable pain. At 3 months the swelling was mostly gone and the line was coming together, and now at 6 months it has settled in far more naturally and firmly than back then. I used to get so stressed about clothes in summer, but there are far fewer restrictions now, which was great! I worried a lot about sagging, but there is honestly zero sagging, so I always think I am glad I did it,, people around me often say I lost a lot of weight and I am satisfied on every front Dr. Joongjae Baek explained everything thoroughly before surgery, recovery went smoothly without trouble, and now there is no inconvenience at all in daily life, just a pretty line.


It has been 3 months since my stem cell arm liposuction at TheLINE. I am roughly a size 66.5, so before surgery I thought there would not be much visible change. But as my arm line got cleaned up I got a far more satisfying result than expected, and especially since my clothes fit differently, people around me noticed. Right after surgery there was some discomfort, but maybe because it was done with stem cells my recovery was really fast, and now there is no pain or discomfort at all, just like before surgery. I am satisfied enough to confidently recommend it to anyone with the same concern as me. I will definitely recommend it to people around me.


This is my review of arm and accessory breast liposuction with Dr. Yoosuk Chung He said changes would continue up to 3-6 months as the swelling goes down, and at 3 months it has definitely slimmed down a lot compared with the start I am not skinny-skinny, but the bulges are gone and the line is much cleaner Because it was done with stem cells, recovery was easy and it feels like my arms were always this way, which I love


I had arm and accessory breast liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek in May, right before summer~ It has already been 3 months since the liposuction! Summers run long and hot these days, so I am glad I did it in advance and I am enjoying it~! I also lost a few more kilos, but people noticed on their own and said my whole frame looked smaller, haha And when I shop for clothes I can buy without worrying about my frame, accessory breast tissue or upper arms, which I love!! Also there is almost no lumpiness at all, so nobody even realizes I had liposuction! The scars are tiny too, so I am happy, haha I thought about this surgery for years - I should have done it sooner~~ If you are thinking about it, I recommend doing it as soon as you can!!!


Hello, leaving my 3-month review of fat grafting and liposuction! I had fat taken from my abdomen, love handles and saddlebags and grafted into my hip dips and pelvis It has already been 6 weeks since the second procedure, so I have started exercising again, haha When I put on workout clothes the hip dips are gone and I love it! I can feel my whole shape has changed! Another thing I like is that the soft belly fat I used to have is gone, so in workout clothes I can sit anywhere, haha I used to prefer standing in case my belly folded Even though I gained a little weight, I do not look spread out like before, and thanks to the cleaned-up shape it does not show, haha! Overall I am very satisfied, and I feel much more confident when working out ^^ From now on I will combine diet and exercise to keep the line looking even better! I really recommend it to anyone who is hesitating!!


It has already been 6 months since Dr. Jaeho Cho did my arm lift and Dr. Yoongeun Kim did my arm liposuction. The major swelling is all gone and even the residual swelling is nearly gone. My arms are thinner than before surgery and the sagging skin is gone, so they are smooth and I am happy. I visited the clinic recently for my 6-month check and they said the progress is good. There are still scars, but they explained it is a matter of my skin type and gave me an injection that helps with scarring. I liked that they still pay careful attention on the aftercare side. I am scheduled for two more injections. They say it fades with time, so I will keep up the care and wait.


It is 3 months since Dr. Jaeho Cho did my arm and accessory breast liposuction The swelling was almost all gone within 1-2 months and the scars have faded a lot Once they fade a bit more I do not think I will notice them at all My arms are not bony, but that bulky look in clothes is mostly gone and my arms look longer, haha I even wore tank tops this summer and I am satisfied


Time flew and I am already at 3 months. Honestly I have not exercised or taken proper care of myself, but luckily my job keeps me on my feet, so it is holding up well To go through how each area feels at 3 months~ For the abdomen and love handles, what I like most is that with the love handles gone, my waistline shows nicely in fitted clothes. My upper arms also have a prettier line than before surgery, so I feel more confident in tank tops I had breast fat grafting at the same time and it has held up well without shrinking so far. I preferred something natural and suited to my frame rather than a dramatic increase, so I am very happy with the size and I hope it stays this way. I will start taking better care of myself now so I can keep it looking as nice as it does today~


It is 6 months since my transconjunctival under-eye fat repositioning! Dr. Yoosuk Chung did it Before, my under-eyes looked hollow and people often told me I looked tired without makeup There is a limit to covering it with makeup, so after a lot of thinking I had the surgery! I was worried because it is my face, but the swelling went down quickly and recovery was fast, so daily life was not much of a problem~ Now I can go with light makeup and I love it!! I do not have to heavily cover my dark circles, so my makeup is lighter and nothing creases under my eyes, so my skin looks better too, which is really great People around me say I look better too, haha. It does not look like I had surgery at all, it just looks prettier, haha My doctor's experience and aesthetic sense are the best, and all the staff are so kind, so I recommend the clinic to everyone!


It has been 3 months since my 270-degree arm and accessory breast liposuction. For aftercare I do Pilates 3 times a week and I am not dieting, haha Even with just that much, you can clearly see my arms getting thinner! In my case the swelling went down very slowly but steadily Whenever I look in the mirror I wonder when on earth my arms will get thin, but when I look at the photos from before surgery, 1 month and 2 months, I think, ah, it really is going down! They say it keeps going down until 6 months, so I am looking forward to it even more, haha Especially when I wear a tee I used to wear before the liposuction, there is extra room around the arms and you can really see the difference in how it hangs! People around me say I did well with the arm liposuction and that I look like I lost weight, haha I cannot wait to see how much more the swelling goes down next month, haha


Hello, it has already been 6 months since my liposuction and breast fat grafting~ Every day is so interesting and fun. I have been playing the before-and-after photo game and I do not even know where the time went. For about a month after surgery I had a fair amount of bruising, which was unpleasant to look at, but other than that it was less pain than a muscle-ache sort of feeling. Even on the day, the areas I was happiest about were my abdomen and upper arms. The lower belly that really used to bulge is completely gone, and my upper arms, which had never once seen the outside world in a sleeveless top, got slim, so that was the best. I am also really glad I did the love handles, because the back view is different when I wear a fitted T-shirt. My breasts had also lost all their shape after two childbirths and looked like a tired grandmother's, which stressed me out. With stem cell fat grafting both the firmness and the size went up, and it feels like before I got married - as a woman, could there be a greater joy than this? The bruising on my breasts lasted longer than expected, which was hard, but there was no particular pain, and other than being puffy and a bit awkward early on, there was nothing. What makes me so glad I chose TheLINE's stem cell liposuction and fat grafting is that they always consider each person's preferences and health and never push or perform an excessive surgery. I am most satisfied that they operate with future discomforts and changes that come with age in mind. Dr. Joongjae Baek did the liposuction, and there is not a single uneven spot - I am about to forget I ever had liposuction. Dr. Yoosuk Chung did the breast fat grafting and shaped it beautifully with great firmness, so thank you.


Compared with right after surgery, all the firm areas have softened and the surgical scars have faded a lot!! Now I keep squishing my own skin and enjoying how soft it has become, haha My pants are an inch smaller and I wear one size down in tops too I have kept dieting since surgery, and people around me say I look like I keep losing weight, so my motivation to diet keeps growing, haha All the time and money I put into various diets feels a little wasted now, so if you are hesitating, do it while you are even a year younger!!! I recommend it again and again!


I was even considering an arm lift because of the sagging, but I had liposuction instead and I am now at 3 months Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE Plastic Surgery had good reviews, so I consulted him and had the 270-degree version. As the swelling goes down my arms have gotten really much slimmer and the sagging above my elbows has improved a lot, which I love~ Since I did not go as far as a lift, liposuction alone cannot completely remove the sagging on the inner side, but because it was done with stem cells my skin firmness seems to have improved somewhat, so I am satisfied


It has already been 3 months since my liposuction! Right now there is no lumpiness, no pulling discomfort, and nothing uncomfortable when I touch it! The swelling seems almost entirely gone!! My arm line got prettier so I have been wearing nothing but tank tops all summer, haha All I can think is, why did I wait so long to get liposuction, haha If you are thinking about arm liposuction, I recommend doing the accessory breast tissue and the armpit root as well! That bulky, matronly(?) look is definitely gone!! My friends say my arm line got pretty and they are all dying to get it done too! My wedding photo shoot is coming up and with the swelling down I have no worries about my accessory breast tissue or arm line!! If you are preparing for a wedding, definitely do it in advance!!


This is my 3-month review! Dr. Joongjae Baek did my abdomen, love handles and inner thighs~! It definitely feels a bit more refined than at 2 months! They say combining it with dieting works better, but far from dieting I am eating even more...^^ Still, as time goes by the firmness seems to be coming back and the line keeps getting better The weight difference is not big, but even on the same diet as before it keeps coming off little by little, so I am happy..????


It has been 3 months since Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my stem cell arm liposuction. I was happy at the 1-month mark too, but the result became more settled and natural as time passed, so I really think I made the right choice. The swelling and bruising are completely gone, and my arm line has settled in much smoother and firmer. I was especially worried my skin would look uneven or unbalanced, but there is none of that and it looks very natural. As the surgical area keeps refining, my whole body looks a step slimmer, and people often tell me I look like I lost weight. Most of all there is no inconvenience at all with exercise or daily life after the procedure, and my energy recovered quickly, so my routine was not disrupted. The biggest change is that the restrictions on what I could wear because of my upper arms are completely gone, so I can confidently wear short sleeves and slim clothes. The whole process from the first consultation through the procedure and recovery was satisfying, and now that 3 months have passed the result has stabilized and my confidence has grown a lot.


Dr. Joongjae Baek did my arm liposuction! At first I was worried and scared since liposuction is still surgery with anesthesia, but now I am so happy that I am thinking about doing a bit more later! The scars have faded a lot so others cannot tell, and people around me just assume I lost a lot of weight - nobody knows I had liposuction, so I just go along with 'I lost weight'.. haha. I keep wondering why I did not do it sooner, haha


I am 6 months out from my upper arm liposuction and I am very satisfied!! No matter how much I dieted my upper arms never shrank, so I finally had liposuction and I love it. Before surgery I heard scars remain around the armpit, but I have almost none. Even shortly after surgery the scars were barely noticeable. Nobody knows I had surgery - they all just assume I am naturally thin. Especially since I lost about 4-5 kg after the liposuction, the effect shows much better once you lose weight. After losing weight I was even more glad I had the liposuction. Combining it with dieting really gives dramatic results. I used to avoid shirts because they were tight around my upper arms, but now that my arm size itself has gone down, the upper arm area is actually loose, so I really have a delicate fit


I had arm liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho. These days there is no pain or discomfort at all and the sensation is completely normal, so sometimes I forget I even had liposuction. At the one-month mark my arm line had shrunk less than I expected and I felt a little disappointed, but they told me it would gradually tighten over six months, and it really has shrunk visibly. My arm line is completely different now. The bulge at the back of my arm has come down a lot, and above all the line falling from my shoulder is what I like most! The line drops straight down, so my shoulders look slimmer too. ^^ The weather has been so hot lately, and for the first time in my life I spent a midsummer in sleeveless tops. Who knew tank tops were this cool to wear~~~ hehehe Now I just have to work on not gaining the weight back. !!


They said the swelling would be fully gone and the line would settle at three months, so I waited and waited, and the time flew by hehe It happened to be summer, so I wore nothing but the tank tops I had always wanted to wear Everyone I met asked if I had lost weight, said my shoulder line looked prettier, and said you could not tell at all that I had surgery, so I thought "ah, I am so glad I did it" I keep wearing tank tops and looking in the mirror thinking it turned out as well as I hoped, I am so satisfied The incisions were placed on the inner side and healed well so they barely show, which I love


This is my 3-month review after abdomen, love handle liposuction and hip fat grafting with Dr. Jaeho Cho Nothing was very uncomfortable and the scars are fewer than I expected Scarring seems to depend on your own skin type I am not on any particular diet, and my pattern and routine are the same as before surgery - sometimes I eat well, sometimes I hold back, sometimes I even have late-night snacks, but my abdomen keeps shrinking little by little Of course if I dieted alongside it, the swelling and the fat would probably come off even faster, but since I had hip fat grafting I do not want to lose weight, so I am maintaining instead. After going around and around, I think surgery is simply the best


3-month review of abdominoplasty + liposuction It has already been three months since my lift surgery! I had the abdominoplasty with Dr. Jaeho Cho and the abdominal liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek The surgical area is still a bit red! But it does not feel infected or scarred over, so I am taking care of it calmly! Before, when I got dressed, the fold of my lower belly stood out so I could not wear fitted bottoms! These days I am wearing them little by little! I am glad I had the surgery before midsummer arrived! As my clothes get lighter, my body got lighter too, and it feels great!


I had a mini forehead lift with Dr. Yoosuk Chung at the end of January The scar is hard to see now and it looks completely natural Friends I had not seen in a while said I looked prettier and that I did well, which made me proud I am so satisfied that I am thinking about consulting about another area at TheLINE I think this is what people mean when they say you can trust them with it ^^


It has already been three months since my thigh liposuction. I had 360-degree thighs done with Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE. Before surgery I was especially bothered by the flab on my inner thighs, my whole leg line felt blunt, and I was not happy with how pants fit, so I worried a lot. After surgery my silhouette definitely feels more tidied up than before. Right after surgery it took a little time to adjust to daily life with the swelling, bruising and the compression garment, but recovery sped up as time passed, and above all wearing the compression garment has become a natural part of my daily routine, so I wear it without much discomfort. Most of all, compared to before surgery, my inner thigh line has slimmed down, so pants feel much more comfortable and the fit looks neater. I can feel the process of it gradually getting better as time goes on, so I am satisfied. I expect an even more natural and smooth line to settle in as more time passes.


Having a lot of fat on my arms made my whole body look bulky and heavy, which stressed me out I hesitated about arm liposuction for ages before finally making up my mind, and now that six months have passed the swelling is completely gone, and since my upper body is clearly slimmer it looks like I lost weight overall. People around me ask if I lost weight and compliment me on how my arms in particular slimmed down hehe I had it done with Dr. Jungjae Baek, and he targeted exactly the areas that needed it and designed it well, so I think the line settled beautifully. I can now boldly wear the sleeveless tops I could never wear before! Thank you for giving me such a pretty line~!


Posting my review of arm, abdomen and love handle liposuction with fat grafting to the buttocks and pelvis~! It has already been a month, and with time the swelling has gone down much more and the line has become completely natural. The spots that were slightly puffy at first now feel perfectly smooth! There is no bruising and nothing lumpy at all, so unless I mention the surgery no one would notice, it looks that natural hehe If fast recovery matters to you, please really do go with the stem cell method....lol The bruising was almost completely gone from around week three, and now there is not a single bruise mark left. For some reason my skin texture feels softer too. The incisions are fully healed now, so I am just applying ointment and watching for pigmentation. Shall I talk about the line... I look in the mirror every day thinking I am so, so glad I had the surgery.. Now that my waist curves in, the silhouette is completely different when I wear a dress or a slim-fit top I used to have to think about covering up my body shape when getting dressed, but now I just pick whatever pretty clothes I want in my size, and it makes me so happy I cannot even remember the straight-up-and-down waist I had just a month ago lol Doing the love handles too made my hips stand out more and my belly fat shrank ridiculously, so my whole abdomen is slimmer. My waist-pelvis-hip line got so pretty that taking photos is fun now hehe They say the line is still settling, and that it will keep getting prettier for another 2-3 months. I am already more than satisfied, but honestly I am even more excited about what is ahead ???? Dr. Yoongeun Kim is the best... ????????????????


I had abdominal liposuction with Dr. Yoongeun Kim~ Now at three months, the line has definitely tidied up more than it had at one month and I am really happy with the area I had done I am paying more attention to exercise and weight management, and since my body swells easily I work hard on getting the swelling down while wearing lots of pretty clothes The tight, stiff feeling I had at one month is gone now, and it only comes back slightly after a long workout, but it keeps getting better I can see more coming off as time passes, so I am picking out pretty clothes for the joy of wearing them


At first I only planned to do my arms, but after looking at photos and reviews I wanted to do my abdomen too~ So I consulted with Dr. Jungjae Baek and booked the surgery date right away. I had my arms, abdomen and corset line done together. I always thought I had a muscular build, and the doctor honestly told me I have a lot of muscle and not that much fat, so a "bone arm" would not be possible, which made me trust him even more. Still, I decided to go ahead thinking let us at least tidy up the line, and after surgery the bruising and pain were not that bad, so it was manageable. I took the subway home alone, and my family has not noticed a thing to this day, I was that fine lol I went home, cooked and did the housework lol I have a muscular build and was 57 kg, and I really hated that blunt feeling around my upper arms and love handles - that is tidied up now, and after surgery I am 56 kg. Lately I went abroad and ate a ton, and took a vacation too, so I think I gained some weight, but it is still not the old upper arm fat and belly fat. Overall I am satisfied, and I plan to gradually take care of the weight I gained on vacation!


I hated the flab on my lower abdomen so I had abdominal liposuction! I consulted with Dr. Yoongeun Kim, and he was so kind and had such a good demeanor that I felt at ease hehe The first week after surgery was a bit hard because of the pain, but it was not to the point of being unable to go about daily life and I recovered quickly My lower belly, which bothered me most, went in a lot, and the flab kept tidying up as time went on I have gained quite a bit of weight compared to a year ago and I still have not lost the 2-3 kg he recommended, but my belly no longer puts on weight the way it used to, which I love The lumpy line I hated is tidied up and my lower belly does not stick out anymore If I do another area next time, I will do it at TheLINE hehe


It has already been three months since my abdomen and love handle liposuction. When I first had the surgery I was half doubtful, but looking back now it was really a good choice. Honestly I have been so busy with work that I barely exercised... if anything I think I gained about 3 kg from stress eating (?). But strangely, my abdomen feels almost unchanged. Normally my belly would have been the first thing to bulge, but this time my sides and lower belly stayed the same. The areas that had liposuction really do show a clear difference. Compared to the one-month mark, my abdominal line feels much more natural and smooth, and as the swelling went down my skin got a lot softer too. My pants are still loose as ever. Honestly it is a little disappointing that I could not exercise at all, but I plan to start at the gym again soon and build a firmer ab line. Thank you again to Dr. Jaeho Cho, and to anyone considering liposuction, I would say do not hesitate.


Before surgery, rapid weight loss and liposuction had left the inner skin of my arms quite loose, so wearing short sleeves or sleeveless tops was limited and it bothered me quite a bit in daily life. I had arm liposuction and an arm lift together with Dr. Jaeho Cho. Right after surgery there was bruising and swelling, but it gradually settled with time, and although there was pain it was not to the point of making daily life difficult. I think recovery was about average. The scar runs along the inner arm and is still red, and I am managing it with ointment. I am only three months in and they say it takes about a year to fade, so I do not think it is time to judge the scar yet. The loose skin is tidied up, and I am satisfied with that part.


It has been three months since my arm line and accessory breast liposuction Arms are one of those areas that just will not slim down with exercise after having a baby In winter I could forget about it, but every summer as it got hotter it was always a source of stress Then I saw an Instagram friend post her surgery review and went ahead and booked a consultation and surgery too!! I had it done with Dr. Jungjae Baek, and now at three months I wonder why I did not do it sooner... hehe If you have fat on your arms, the accessory breast area is not something you can just skip, so I did that together with my arms Maybe because it was liposuction using stem cells, I could go about daily life right after surgery and the pain was minimal, so the recovery process was not hard at all and I am really happy about that part too That dangling flab under the upper arm that every woman feels self-conscious about!! It always bothered me too, and it was solved in one go hehehe


It has been three months since my buttock and pelvis fat grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim The fat was taken from my thighs and knees by liposuction and put into my buttocks and pelvis! The bulges on my thighs are smoothly tidied up, and the buttock graft has settled down a bit from right after surgery, but at this level I think it took well!! The line is different, so my legs have room in clothes and my hip line is prettier than before, which makes getting dressed so nice! I have been gaining a little weight again lately, so I am going to start a diet too!


At about a month in, the swelling has gone down a lot compared to before, and since I kept getting massage care the fibrous lumps are almost gone I never had that much arm fat to begin with, but I had arm liposuction to get rid of the flab that bothered me, and now that flab is all gone and the line is slim, which I love Dr. Jungjae Baek had all good reviews for arm liposuction, and he really is skilled They say swelling keeps going down until three months, so I think it will get even slimmer from here


It has been three months since my abdomen, love handle and arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek I used to only try to cover up, but now I only look for clothes that show off the line lol At three months the scars have faded and it looks so natural, like someone who was slim to begin with and never had liposuction, so I love it The line keeps tidying up as time passes, and these days I wear nothing but tank tops, so my confidence is through the roof lol


It has already been three months since my upper arm + accessory breast + surrounding arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek!! I chose TheLINE while looking for a clinic with fast recovery, and I am really satisfied hehe The pain was not bad and the swelling went down quickly, so I got back to daily life fast. At one month the swelling dropped sharply, and now at three months it feels almost entirely gone! Compared to before surgery my arm line is definitely thinner and smoother, so I am really satisfied Especially since I had the accessory breast and the surrounding arm area done together, I feel more confident wearing sleeveless and short-sleeve tops lol They say the residual swelling keeps going down until six months, so I am looking forward to the changes still to come! To anyone hesitating, I really recommend it bb


Now that six months have passed since liposuction, both my body and my mind feel much lighter. In January this year I had abdomen, love handle and inner thigh liposuction at TheLINE (Dr. Jungjae Baek) and had the removed fat grafted into my hip dips. They said the first few months can differ depending on how you take care of yourself, so I did my best with diet and light exercise, and I think that helped a lot. Especially with my waist and side line tidied up, my body shape looks different every time I get dressed, and confidence followed naturally. I worried once or twice about it coming back, but so far it has stayed stable. It is not simply about losing weight - the balance of my figure feels different, so my satisfaction only grows with time. For anyone wondering early on whether it really turned out okay, wait and it changes hehe


I have always dieted.. but the arm skin that had already stretched out showed no sign of shrinking, so I finally made up my mind and decided on an arm lift. TheLINE Plastic Surgery has a lot of lift reviews and the results looked good, so I consulted with Dr. Jaeho Cho and had the surgery. From the consultation he explained everything I was curious about professionally, so I could go into surgery with trust. Honestly the first month after surgery was pretty hard with the triple combo of pain + swelling + discomfort, and even my hands felt so swollen that it was a bit scary. But around the second month my arm line started to show, and I began to hope, like, oh? Is this getting better? The bruising was not as bad as I expected. Now I am at three months! The swelling is not completely gone yet, but the sagging skin is noticeably tidied up compared to before. I heard that dramatically cutting away all the loose skin is impossible and dangerous with any surgery, so I did not expect much, but it is far firmer than before, and I am so happy that clothes that really did not fit before now fit well. People around me say I look a lot smaller, so my self-esteem is climbing hehe Of course I have kept dieting since the surgery, so I think that makes the effect show more. This surgery does have a fairly long recovery period, and they say it takes at least six months for the swelling to properly go down... so I plan to keep watching and taking care of it going forward !!


Posting my review of full-body (abdomen, arms, accessory breast, thighs) liposuction and buttock fat grafting~! I consulted with Dr. Yoosuk Chung and had the surgery with him! Honestly my weight did not drop that much ;) It was vacation season so I dropped all my workouts and ate like crazy But with the problem areas on my abdomen, arms and thighs all tidied up, my whole body line really is completely different. My belly is flat now, even from the side. The real masterstroke was the buttock fat grafting!!! With volume added to my flat buttocks, the waist-buttock-thigh line became natural and feminine. It is volume that might have looked hollow if I had only done liposuction, so the balance is so good and I am 200% satisfied. I heard Dr. Yoosuk Chung is good at liposuction but especially good at grafting, and it is really.... really true He said it would take well and last because it was done with stem cells, and I think that played a part too. I worried a lot before surgery, but I am really glad I went to a professional, systematic clinic and to a doctor with a lot of experience. Around three months it truly feels like my own body, natural, and people around me often say "you lost a lot of weight" Oh, and the scars are not all gone but they have faded a lot with care! They say liposuction is not the end but the beginning, and I completely agree I am going to diet again before the next peak season!


It has already been three months since my arm + back root liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho ! The line comes out nicely now and there is almost no swelling ! I only do yoga for exercise and adjusted my diet a little, losing about 1-2 kg, and maybe that is why the treated area looks even prettier hehe I have been wearing all the summer clothes I could not wear before and taking lots of pretty photos hehehe Before surgery I used to edit my arms in photos a lot, but now I do not edit at all!! lol I really, really recommend it!


Three months have already passed since I had my arms, accessory breast, abdomen and love handles all done at once. These days I almost forget I had surgery, but I am so glad I did it! I used to avoid tight tops on my arms and end up covering my belly because of how it folded when I sat down, but now I feel confident when I get dressed or look in the mirror. I love that the flab I hated is gone Especially the accessory breast, an area I never paid much attention to, was the masterstroke to include. When I wear summer clothes it definitely feels slimmer and neater. Up to two months it still felt like a recovery period, but from three months it feels completely normal! Now I feel maintenance matters more, so I naturally do diet and exercise alongside it. Being free from the flab that weighed on me has made daily life much easier too hehe I even went to the pool >< Thank you, Dr. Jungjae Baek ^^


It has already been six months since my facelift. It looks so natural that people around me do not even notice the subtle change in my face shape, and with my face shape tidied up my confidence has grown a lot ^^ The jaw-tightness feeling and the scar behind my ear have healed remarkably well, so these days I often forget I even had surgery. Honestly the scar behind my ear did not seem to be healing as fast as I expected, so I worried, but when I took a photo at the six-month mark it is almost gone, which is a relief. The clinic remembered to ask me for follow-up checks too, and I am grateful for such good aftercare. And thank you to Dr. Yoosuk Chung, who changed my impression through the surgery without a single side effect ^^ I am so satisfied, and people keep telling me I have a youthful-looking face, which makes me very happy.


I had abdomen, love handle and thigh (inner and outer) liposuction with Dr. Yoongeun Kim! I gained a bit of weight and got nervous, so I compared with old photos - I am at six months and I slacked on care, so my weight went up slightly, but my line is much better now, which surprised me!! My overall body line is set, so if I lose a little more weight I think the line will be pretty! I never even dreamed of a thigh gap before, but these days I have more of a gap than I used to, and I think it will be maximized if I lose weight, so I feel hopeful and dieting is fun now


I heard the results of liposuction show better at three months, but I already thought it turned out well from the moment I took off the compression garment, and I keep feeling my clothes get roomier and can see with my own eyes how much came off From the consultation Dr. Jungjae Baek was thorough and explained in great detail how things would change after surgery, so I felt I could trust him, and the surgery was done so well Now when I get dressed the fit of my clothes is completely different from before surgery! Even in thin summer clothes I do not have to hold my stomach in, which is wonderful If you are going to have liposuction, really do it at TheLINE! I recommend it so much!!


Dr. Jaeho Cho removed 200 cc of fat from each side of my arms and accessory breast area, and right now I am dieting alongside it so I have lost quite a bit of weight overall The line is so natural and neatly tidied up that I feel great every time I look in the mirror! There is one incision on each side and I am applying ointment now, but unless I raise my arms it does not show, so I really love it Maybe because the method uses stem cells, recovery was extremely fast too The bruising I worried about most turned out to be only faint yellow bruising, so I am very happy about that as well I really recommend it for the line and for the recovery speed :)


It has already been three months since my arm liposuction! First of all, the major swelling is of course completely gone and my arms feel almost like my own again, sensation and all. Sometimes they feel tight at night, but it is much better than at first and it is just like mild muscle soreness, so it is nothing! Dr. Jaeho Cho did mine, and he operated safely so recovery was fast and there were no side effects at all. The line tidied up naturally, so these days people often ask if I lost weight depending on what I wear~ They say it keeps getting better with time, so I am looking forward to more changes~


It has been three months since my arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek! Before surgery my upper arms were thick overall, so wearing short sleeves or sleeveless tops felt like too much It made my upper body look blunt and I always wore clothes that could cover it up.. The first two weeks after surgery my arms ached stiffly, but from week three the swelling gradually went down and the bruising almost cleared. After about a month there was no real interference with daily life. Now the scars are barely visible and blend naturally into my skin tone, so they do not show! My arm line is smoothly tidied up and the firmness is holding up well! The range of clothes I can wear is far wider than before, and people around me say my arms got much slimmer, so my satisfaction is high. Given how much I agonized over it, the result exceeded my expectations, so I think it was a choice I made without regret!!


My upper arm fat stressed me out so much that reading reviews made me want to do it right away, so I decided to go for it They explained that a dramatic change would be difficult since I have a lot of muscle, and taking that into account I am more than satisfied with the result! I had worried a lot because there are many reviews about becoming lumpy from taking out too much or having side effects, but there were no side effects at all, and no lumpiness in the line and no sagging either It definitely feels tidier, and I think the biggest strength is that it got prettier in a natural way It used to worry me every summer, but this summer getting dressed is so much easier This is my first liposuction so I cannot compare directly with other clinics, but judging by the reviews, it is true that there was almost no bruising and recovery was fast Now I want to do other areas too lol


My upper arms made me look heavy whenever I got dressed, so while having arm surgery I also did the back root area, because the flesh that pops out when I wear a tank top or underwear made my back view unattractive! I consulted with Dr. Jaeho Cho, and he said it is safe because it uses stem cells and that recovery is fast, so I trusted him, put down a deposit that same day and booked the surgery date right then lol On the day of surgery I got nervous in the operating room and was shaking and scared, but the OR nurses kindly told me not to worry, and before the anesthesia the doctor made eye contact, talked with me and breathed deeply with me, so thanks to them I had the surgery feeling calm!! It was the first time I met a doctor this kind on the operating table hehehe On the day of surgery it was a bit stiff and there was some pain, but the prescribed painkillers helped a lot, so I went back to work at the office the very next day!!! hehehe Because I worked and moved around right the next day, the swelling went down quickly, and with pumpkin juice and diligent aftercare visits, even at just one month I can clearly see how different my arm line looks in clothes, so I am so satisfied hehe I am not on a separate diet, and since I still have some fibrous lumps I only do yoga to loosen up and stretch, and for food I just cut back a little on snacks hehe Especially the side bulge came down a lot, so my front and back views in clothes are completely different and I am wearing lots of pretty summer outfits now~~ hehe They say you have to watch the line until three months and that residual swelling will keep going down, so I am really looking forward to it hehe


I was a bride-to-be who was dieting. At a glance I was not the kind of build people would call overweight. When I went for my consultation at the clinic I was 163 cm and 57 kg. My weight goes up and down easily but I was good at maintaining 54-55 kg. I had never gone over 58 kg in my life. I do not even drink, but as I entered my thirties I hated how my lower belly stuck out. After thinking it over I had abdomen and love handle liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho, and since I was already there I had hip dip grafting done as well. Early on there was swelling and I thought it had not come off as much as I expected, but by two months I got more and more satisfied. I love that I can wear crop tops now and that I do not have to hold my stomach in! My lower belly used to stick out so I could not wear fitted, pretty pajamas, but these days I have gotten into shopping for loungewear and wear pretty pajamas every day, and my husband loves it too. I am the type whose acne scars do not fade easily, so the liposuction marks on my lower abdomen are still there, but they keep getting lighter. Also, I did this after seeing a close older friend get liposuction, and I had almost no bruising right after surgery. In liposuction reviews you see people covered in deep blue bruises, but mine was nothing like that. I wore my compression garment diligently for a month, and maybe that is why the swelling went down fast, and now that time has passed there is no sagging. Liposuction raised my satisfaction with life! Thank you so much for giving me back my confidence.


This is my 3-month review of full-body liposuction + hip dip fat grafting. After surgery the days went by so slowly that I wondered when three months would come, and now it is already three months. The swelling seems to be all gone, and the issue now is how to maintain it well. My thighs keep slimming down further. My abdomen held up well until two months, but I was seriously ill recently and had no energy, so I could not keep up my diet. Because of that it started creeping back a bit, so I hurried to start dieting and exercising again. Even so, it comes back more slowly than before. The scars I worried about most healed well without raising up once I applied keloid ointment, and now I am using a brightening ointment to make them less visible. I made a big decision in my life to have liposuction and fat grafting, and I am so satisfied - now that summer is here I wear whatever I want with confidence, and it feels great. Thank you so much, Dr. Jungjae Baek.


I timed the surgery well, and now that clothes are getting shorter I am comfortably picking out and wearing the tank tops I could not even attempt last year The thickness matters, but the line got prettier and straighter too, and I think doing the accessory breast together was a great call The pain and bruising were uncomfortable for about 1-2 weeks, and after that I could go about daily life freely Having more clothing options and gaining confidence is the best part???????? The major swelling seems almost gone, and they say the residual swelling goes down until six months, so I am looking forward to more????


It has already been three months since my upper arm liposuction, and now I marvel every time I wear a sleeveless top! At first I worried a lot about the bruising and swelling, but the clinic took good care of me so recovery was really fast. Most of all, I slimmed down so naturally that people around me think I went on a diet hehe My arm line falls smoothly, so I feel confident in photos too. When I look at the before-and-after photos, even I find it amazing. Dr. Jaeho Cho explained everything thoroughly from the consultation so I trusted him, and I am satisfied with the result too. It was such a good choice that all those days I spent worrying about my arms feel like a waste!


I had love handle and saddlebag liposuction with buttock grafting Dr. Jaeho Cho did the liposuction and Dr. Yoosuk Chung did the grafting I had gained weight in a way I really disliked and my body felt heavy, so I decided to have liposuction before the weather got hot, and I am satisfied I had so many spots of fat that bothered me here and there, and the line seems to be tidying up, which I like Part of me thinks I should have gone 360 degrees while I was at it, but I can see the line coming down more and more as time passes, so I am satisfied


This is my 3-month review of thigh & knee (Chanel line) liposuction at TheLINE The swelling went down slowly so it does not feel like a huge reduction, but when I compare the before-and-after photos the difference is big, so I am satisfied My thighs still tingle or itch sometimes and the scars are slightly visible, but that is gradually improving with time too I wish a bit more swelling would come off, but at this point it is not swelling, it is fat, so I think I need to start dieting from here. The fat above my knees used to stress me out too, and the line is clearly different now, so I think I will enjoy dieting


This is my review after abdominal liposuction and hip dip grafting with Dr. Jungjae Baek Compared to before surgery, my waistline, love handles and front abdomen are all much slimmer and I am happy with it I have been too busy to exercise so it seems to be coming out a bit lately, but for how little I am doing, I love that I am not gaining weight I should have done it sooner~~ Now I am going to pay more attention to exercise and diet..✩


This is my 3-month review of stem cell abdominoplasty. Now that three months have passed there is no interference with daily life at all. There is no pain or anything like that. The scar seems to have healed well too. Comparing with my pre-surgery photos, it looks neater and I am satisfied. It is an area diet cannot address, so I went in accepting the scar, which makes my satisfaction high, and the doctor told me to take a long-term view of the scar, so I expect it to improve further as the months pass. The surgery was done by Dr. Jaeho Cho


Three months after upper arm liposuction!! I had my arms and accessory breast done with Dr. Yoosuk Chung! At this point I honestly cannot even tell that I had surgery!! Every tiny little discomfort has completely disappeared lol My friend said she had residual discomfort until six months, but maybe thanks to the stem cells my recovery was so fast that she found it amazing!!! The scars barely show apart from the color, so I love it hehe The remaining fat naturally shapes the line so it does not look like surgery at all, and everyone thinks I just succeeded at a big diet hehe (I have only lost 2 kg so far lol) If I diet a little more I think I can get my dream body, so my motivation is burning and it has been great in every way If you are hesitating, there is really nothing to hesitate about!!! Hesitating only delays your recovery!!!! Looking at everyone around me, I think mine turned out the best, really!! I recommend it to everyone around me lol Dr. Yoosuk Chung, thank you so much


Finally at six months, yay ! Before surgery my abdomen was overloaded with subcutaneous fat, so even in photos the line looked like a balloon filled with air lol The bruising lasted about 2-3 weeks. Swelling depends on how you manage it - I could see the line tidied up from the first week so I do not think I had much major swelling, and the residual swelling came down steadily from 1 to 3 months. The pain turned into just stiffness after 3 days, and within a week you are back to normal There are two marks on my panty line and the color has changed to almost skin tone. For care I had laser, but I think I could have skipped it For the change in line, see the photos. There is no sagging, so my satisfaction is very high these days.. (this probably depends on how much you take out) After the surgery people around me definitely say I lost weight ,, ! I got confident about clothes too, so I keep buying whatever I want to wear.. (be warned)


I had my surgery with Dr. Baek. It has already been six months. Before surgery my upper arms were big, which made my torso look much bigger, and the stress led me to decide on surgery. The recovery period was about 7 days, so I really recovered fast. Now at six months, the scars are one under each armpit, and from around three months they improved to where you have to look closely to see them, so I wear sleeveless tops. The line got so much better that I am very happy with how my clothes fit. I have a lot of stretch marks so the doctor was worried about my skin elasticity, but whether it is thanks to the stem cells or the doctor's skill, I cannot really tell that it sagged. People around me ask if I lost weight and say my body looks prettier, and my confidence went way up, so I even wear the clothes I used to hesitate over!!


It has been three months since my abdominal liposuction + abdominoplasty~! I had gained so much weight on my abdomen that my skin was sagging, so I had liposuction and abdominoplasty together Dr. Yoongeun Kim did the liposuction and Dr. Jaeho Cho did the lift It was a big surgery for me so I was very nervous, but after the consultation I felt more eager than worried, so I went ahead with it Now I only have pain when I run during cardio (intermittently), and in daily life I forget I even had surgery The doctor first told me it takes about six months, up to a year, so I was thinking long term, but at three months the swelling has come down a lot from my sides and I can see it lifting up more and more, which is great I could not exercise while recovering after surgery, but with the sagging skin that stressed me most gone, I look much slimmer too At my last follow-up the doctor said I am recovering well and not to worry, so now I feel reassured and have started exercising again ^^


Three months have already passed! It feels like I was on the operating table just recently.. The recovery really is the best of the best hehe It was only stiff for a day or two and quickly became bearable, and there was almost no bruising hehe Residual swelling still feels like it is there, and there is no pain at all, so childcare goes without saying, and housework and going to work are all exactly as normal now! I had some fibrous lumps at one month too, and since they go away with time I waited, and now they are gone hehe I think I had fewer than in most reviews (for me it was more that bony areas like the ribs got a bit hard) At one month I worried a little because the swelling did not seem to have gone down much, but now at three months a lot has come off, so my abdominal line shows better and my thighs feel slimmer too As the swelling goes down the line looks prettier It is not a dramatic difference yet, but it has only been 3 months, and thinking about how much more will be gone in another 3 months is exciting!! I cannot wait to see how I look at 6 months


It's been 2 months since I had lipo on my abdomen, love handles and arms, and every time people tell me my lines look nice I feel like the money was worth it, so I'm really happy. I had a bit of biobond and it's gone now, and the lines came out even more than last month. I used to avoid sleeveless tops when shopping, but now I buy them if they're cute, and just seeing my pants size change makes me so happy haha. I agonized over whether to do it for so long, and now that time feels like such a waste - doing it sooner is best haha. Do it early, recover early, and after that it's honestly a whole new world haha. Thank you Dr. Joongjae Baek for changing my body like this.


It's already been 3 months since I had liposuction on my abdomen and love handles :) I had my procedure with Dr. Yoongeun Kim at TheLINE, and from the consultation he checked everything thoroughly, and on the day of surgery he even came to the recovery room to look after me. When I went back to the clinic for my 3-month check, he examined the treated areas carefully again. My stomach used to stick out and it always bothered me, but now even my lower belly has gone flat! With the belly fat gone my overall proportions look better, and clothes fall much more slimly on me. My waist and back lines in particular have been tidied up, so every time I look in the mirror I can feel how much slimmer I look haha. My pants size went down too! The pants I used to wear are loose at the waist so I take them in with an adjustable button, and when I buy new ones I go a size smaller. At one month I was still wearing XL pants, but now L fits with room to spare. For tops I started at a size 66, and now a 55 fits well, so my style options have widened too. My weight hasn't dropped much, but because my belly and waist lines changed, my whole body looks different! He's a doctor I trust, so I've been actively recommending him to people around me :)


I had hip fat grafting with Dr. Jaeho Cho and I'm so happy with it that I'm posting a review~! I had always been on the thin side, then suddenly gained a lot of weight in a few months, so I went in for arm liposuction, and since I was having lipo anyway they said even a small amount grafted into my hips would look good, so I did it! My hip line is straight and flat, you see. In January I had under-eye fat grafting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung, and it really changed my whole impression - one of the best things I've ever done. So when it came to my arms and hip grafting, I chose TheLINE without a second thought. I wondered whether such a small amount was even worth injecting, but they explained that putting in too much actually makes the graft take less well, and a moderate amount survives better! They also said that since I have a small frame, even a small amount would make a noticeable difference. Still, honestly I didn't expect much. But after having it done I was so happy with the result that I couldn't help posting a review.. hahaha I have no hip volume and a bit of hip dips - can you see how the line changed? While it was swollen it actually felt a little oddly big, but as the swelling went down bit by bit it became natural, and the change in the line is clearly visible. I'll need more time to know for sure whether any of it goes away, but for now I'm really happy with it!


I can't believe 3 months have already passed since my surgery. It reminds me all over again how fast time goes. When I first decided to have surgery I honestly had a lot of doubts and worries. It wasn't only about changing how I look - I think a bigger part of it was wanting to take better care of myself and finally settle something I had thought about for a long time. I had arm, abdomen and thigh liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE, and hip fat grafting on the same day. With that many areas done at once I was worried about recovery, but 3 months on my recovery has settled quite well and the visible swelling is almost all gone, so I feel much more at ease. More than anything, it's amazing how naturally I notice the change in my body shape every time I get dressed. I always felt self-conscious wearing fitted clothes, and I used to avoid anything that showed my figure because I had no confidence. But these days I can choose clothes that show my shape much more comfortably and confidently. With my body shape tidied up, even the time I spend looking in the mirror feels different, and starting to like what I see there is one of the biggest changes. My sensation is gradually coming back too. Right after surgery the biobond and the odd skin sensation bothered me more than I expected, but as time passed the feeling has been returning and the areas that were uncomfortable early on are much softer now. I was quite worried about scars. Of the five surgical marks, the ones on my arms have faded noticeably, and the three on my lower body are still a bit dark, but luckily they are all in places that aren't exposed, so in daily life they're barely noticeable, and since I expect them to fade like my arms with time, I don't stress about it much. Actually, at my first consultation I was told that because I have a lot of muscle, the change might not be dramatic. So I had lowered my own expectations, but after going through recovery I was surprised at how clearly my lines look more defined. What I'm most happy about is that the treated areas don't put weight back on easily. I've gained a little weight overall recently, but in my arms, abdomen and thighs I can definitely feel the effect of the surgery. As my body changed, my mindset changed too. Before, whenever I was tired or stressed I would put off taking care of myself, and that led to a vicious cycle of lower confidence. Now I've stepped a little out of that pattern and I take care of myself with a positive routine again. It's not just a simple wish to look pretty - it's more that I want to live as a healthier, more satisfied version of myself. Even if I could go back to before the surgery, I would make the same choice without hesitation. I have absolutely no regrets about the surgery itself; if anything I feel grateful to the person I was for choosing it, given that it was my first general anesthesia and my first surgery. Of course I can't say everything is perfect, but the process of changing in order to look after myself is a very meaningful and precious experience for me. I'm looking forward to recovering a little more from here and settling into an even more natural, stable line than now. I want to keep accepting the changes ahead positively and keep taking care of myself the way I do now. Most of all, Dr. Jaeho Cho! Thank you for taking such care in shaping my lines.


It's been 3 months since I had abdomen and love handle liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho. The reason I first came to this clinic was thigh liposuction, and back then I searched around a lot of clinics online and in person before choosing here after reading reviews saying it was the safest and that recovery was fast. Not only do I not regret the choice, I'm extremely happy with it. I used to get stressed looking at fat that never came off no matter how much I exercised, and my confidence and self-esteem dropped, but after thigh liposuction I gradually gained confidence when getting dressed. After the thigh and knee (Chanel line) liposuction I also wanted to get rid of my lower belly and side fat, so I booked a date right away and had abdomen and love handle liposuction as well. They shaped the lines beautifully and safely without over-suctioning, so all I can think is that I really made the right choice of clinic.


It's been 3 months since I had upper body liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE Plastic Surgery! I had stem cell liposuction on my whole upper body including arms, accessory breast tissue and abdomen, and since there were many areas and I weigh a fair amount, I had autologous blood transfusion as well. It isn't mandatory, but they said it helps with recovery and general condition, and in the end it feels like a really good decision! About 6700cc was removed in total, but I came out of anesthesia quickly and my condition on the day was better than expected. Of course there was pain, but it only hurt for a few days and I could go about normal life. The swelling went down noticeably day by day and the bruising faded faster than I expected. Now the swelling is almost completely gone, to the point where no one would know even with my clothes off, and my lines look lovely. I used to carry a lot of fat so I was worried about sagging, but at around the three-month mark there is really no sagging at all, and as the lines settle it feels natural and firm, so I'm extremely happy. Getting dressed is fun again!


It's my third month since arm liposuction! I had mine with Dr. Joongjae Baek haha I think right now is the stage where the parts that felt awkward before are settling into my own natural arm line! The bulge on the side has almost flattened out and my arms are much thinner, so the heavy look in my upper body is nearly gone. I'll keep massaging well and managing my weight while looking forward to more results haha And since it's stem cell surgery, my scars seem to heal well too..? The scars where I had surgery have faded a lot now..! If you just apply scar cream consistently it really does get much better! For scar cream, go to a pharmacy and ask for surgical scar cream (even better if it's prescribed after being seen for the surgical scar). I applied it every morning and night and the results were great haha Just when I think it's done, time passes and a little more comes off, and then a little more, so I'm already happy now, and even though it feels like it's really finished, knowing that waiting until 6 months could bring even better results..! makes my heart flutter hahaha I hope my review helps a lot of people haha


I had abdomen, love handle, thigh and knee (Chanel line) liposuction plus hip fat grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim~! My figure used to be straight up and down, and now I have a waistline and hips, so my shape looks so much prettier. Looking back at my pre-op photos to post this review, I can hardly believe it's me... Since so many areas were treated I expected to swell up like a balloon, but not at all. There was honestly hardly any swelling or bruising, so I wondered if I'd really had surgery, but then I saw my belly fat gone and hips there and thought, ah, I really did have surgery... hahaha I think it's thanks to the stem cells plus the doctor's skill. Dr. Kim's golden hands, fully confirmed. Everyone, go to TheLINE!!!


It's my third month since abdomen and love handle liposuction! It's already been 3 months since I had it with Dr. Yoongeun Kim at TheLINE. There's no pain or after-effects at all, to the point where I forget I ever had surgery, and the lines seem to be settling more and more. Even when I eat a lot it doesn't stick out like before, and when I lie down my stomach is completely flat, so I love it ????


It's my second month after an arm lift with Dr. Jaeho Cho! My arms, which used to sag, are definitely straight now, and people I know say my whole body looks smaller and that you can tell. Every time I hear that it makes my day haha Right now I'm watching what I eat, and the swelling feels similar to how it was at one month. I was worried about that, but they said swelling takes at least 3 months and up to about 6 months to watch, so I'm settling my anxious mind once again haha I had the 4-stage incision so there's bound to be more swelling, and dieting alone would never have gotten rid of this sagging skin, so overall my satisfaction is high!


I had abdominal liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho. My belly fat never went away after childbirth, so I exercised, dieted and even took diet pills, but it kept coming back and in the end I just had abdominal liposuction. I couldn't be bothered to shop around clinics, so I decided on TheLINE based only on the stem cells, the reviews and the doctors' profiles. I went in for a consultation and had surgery the very next day. I barely bruised, and there was none of that biobond people talk about so much. I was a little disappointed that there were only two aftercare sessions, but since the aftercare seems to be aimed at breaking down biobond anyway, and no biobond formed, two sessions felt like enough. I have two scars along my underwear line, and they say they'll disappear with time; after 3 months they have faded a bit. At 3 months my love handles started bothering me too, so I had the corset line (love handles and bra line) done as well. I regretted not doing it all at once haha It costs more than other places, but I think there's a reason for that. Better than going cheap, having a complication and regretting it for life.


It's just past a month since I had stem cell abdominal liposuction plus hip dip grafting with Dr. Joongjae Baek haha Since I had grafting at the same time, I read that it's better not to diet for about a month, so I've been eating as usual and taking a break from exercise, and even so my belly doesn't stick out like it did before surgery and I can see a waistline, so I'm happy haha With the hip dip grafting, while it was swollen I worried it looked too full, but now that some of the swelling has gone down the hip dips are filled in naturally and I love it!-! Now that I'm at one month, I'm going to start dieting~


I had fat taken from my abdomen, love handles and thighs and grafted into my hip dips! The weather is getting hotter and clothes are getting much thinner, but I feel confident in whatever I wear haha I'm also exercising consistently to keep my shape.. and strangely, exercise I used to hate is actually enjoyable these days. Maybe that's a side benefit of liposuction,,, hahaha summer is right around the corner, and being able to fully recover before then makes me think the timing of having surgery 3 months ago was perfect. Dr. Cho said the stem cells would help the graft take well and speed up recovery, and now that I've been through it I understand what he meant haha I'm thinking of trying a bikini on my summer holiday this year haha


It's my sixth month since arm and accessory breast liposuction and an arm lift. I've lost and gained weight over and over since I was young, so other areas sagged too, but my upper arms in particular sagged so much that I often had to buy clothes to fit my arms. My upper arms never fit, so I bought clothes oversized. The sagging was bad enough to be obvious whether I raised or lowered my arms, but after surgery the line itself is different. Whether I lower or raise my arms they feel smooth now, and my arms are thinner. The first 3 days hurt so much that even lying down and getting up was hard, but it got better little by little, and I bruised less than I expected. Right now the scars have faded a little but there's still some redness. They told me scars need a long view, so I'm going to wait. For care I'm just applying sunscreen since the sun is strong and I'm worried about pigmentation, and I love how visibly slim my arm line has become. I can buy clothes two sizes smaller and they fit, and the best part is that I, who used to be busy hiding sagging skin, can now wear short sleeves. Comparing before and after, the upper arm fat that stressed me out every summer is almost entirely gone, so I'm very happy~ Thank you Dr. Jaeho Cho~~!


They say the real results come after 3 months because of swelling, so at first waiting felt daunting, but it was worth it. Seeing the swelling go down day by day made the 3 months pass quickly haha I had abdomen, love handle and thigh liposuction plus hip grafting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung, and the suctioned areas came out with clean lines, and I worried the grafted area would look unnatural, but not at all - the volume came in so naturally that I'm really happy. My waist has never curved in this nicely before; it's exactly the line I wanted.


This is my 1-month review of abdominoplasty plus abdominal liposuction. The liposuction was with Dr. Joongjae Baek and the lift with Dr. Jaeho Cho. I was worried about swelling, but at one month it seems to be going down a lot! I also restarted the exercise I'd paused for a month, at a level that isn't too much. The fold from my belly sagging when I ran used to make things hard, and it's gone now, so I loooove it!! My side lines are definitely more visible than before. I'm going to start dieting again, step by step! It's been great motivation!


Finally it's been a month since my arm lipo haha I kept waiting for the month to pass, but time went by faster than I expected!! I was shocked at my first shower after surgery because there was so little purple bruising... haha When I showed a friend who'd had lipo before she was genuinely surprised at how little bruising there was! Maybe because they put stem cells back in, the bruising and swelling were smaller than expected, and my bruises were completely gone in 10 days!! Fast recovery really seems to be TheLINE's strength!! At one month the major swelling has definitely gone down! Swelling should keep going down until 3 to 6 months, but even at one month my accessory breast area and the bulge you see from the front have changed a lot!! A sort of straight look haha From now on I can exercise, so I'm going to diet at the same time! That should double the effect...!!! On Dr. Jaeho Cho's YouTube I saw that removing about 300cc per arm on someone of average weight gives a really beautiful arm line, so I'm looking forward to it haha Is it okay to feel this excited as time goes on haha


It's my sixth month since thigh and hip liposuction. For the thighs I had the inner area and saddlebags done, and for the hips just the hip line. I consulted with Dr. Joongjae Baek and had surgery with him, and he said taking too much from the hip line can make the buttocks collapse, so he did it safely within a limit that wouldn't cause that. The swelling and bruising weren't that bad and went away quickly. Six months on, I've lived so long as if my legs were always like this that I can barely remember how they were haha That's how few issues there were, and recovery was fast too! The saddlebag line running into my hips is clearly tidied up, which I'm happy about, and a lot came off my inner thighs too~ I never carried that much fat to begin with and my main goal was tidying up the lines, so I love that my legs are straight now. With the thigh fat gone my legs look longer too.


It's one month since arm and accessory breast liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek. A month has gone by already. My shoulders are on the broad side, and to make them look narrower I had to keep my arms against my sides, but then the thickness of my upper arms stood out, and if I minded my arms my shoulders looked too wide, which stressed me out. After surgery the bruising faded quickly, the swelling wasn't bad, and from day 5 there was no pain other than a pulling feeling when I raised my arms! Right now nobody around me would know unless I told them, the lines were shaped nicely to suit my body, and the scars don't bother me unless you look closely. Honestly I found the compression garment annoying and didn't even wear it every single day, but there's no loose skin at all and it feels like exactly the amount I wanted was removed, so I'm very happy!! They say you need to wait until 3 months, but I'm already happy at one month, so I'm really looking forward to my arms at 3 months.


This is my review of upper arm and abdominal liposuction plus breast fat grafting. I had the long-awaited surgery on May 2. I had it with Dr. Yoongeun Kim, and even though my skin is thin and delicate, maybe thanks to his skill, recovery was very fast, unlike my worries. There was pain for the first 3 days after surgery, and just as the coordinator said, it got better from day 3 and I could go about daily life. Around day 5-6 the bruising spread to its worst, then disappeared by around week 2! Personally I had more pain in my upper arms than my belly. My upper arm line got really pretty. There's still some biobond on my belly, but since I did my love handles at the same time I now have a waistline and it looks so nice. The breast graft area doesn't look unnatural either, there's more volume than before, and the size has held steady since the swelling went down. I couldn't control my diet in case the grafted fat was lost, and even so there's a clear before-and-after difference, so from now on I'm going to work on maintaining it.


This is my 1-month review of abdominoplasty plus abdominal liposuction. The liposuction was with Dr. Joongjae Baek and the lift with Dr. Jaeho Cho. I was worried about swelling, but at one month it seems to be going down a lot! I also restarted the exercise I'd paused for a month, at a level that isn't too much. The fold from my belly sagging when I ran used to make things hard, and it's gone now, so I loooove it!! My side lines are definitely more visible than before. I'm going to start dieting again, step by step! It's been great motivation!


Hello~ I'm proud to be able to write this review with such a happy heart. I'm 48 and a mother of two~ Some may think breast surgery is excessive, but I wanted to live a little more beautifully as a woman, so I had 360-degree abdominal, accessory breast and upper arm liposuction and decided on stem cell breast fat grafting. The liposuction was with Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE and the breast grafting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung. I came in thinking about implants at first, but after talking with the coordinator I decided on stem cell fat grafting. I'm glad I went for something more natural rather than dramatic. I'm very happy with the firmness of my 20s and the size correction. My abdomen never got smaller no matter how much I dieted since I was young, and now I finally have a flat stomach, which I love. My size went down, and the clothes I already had look so much better on me. My upper arms were done so smoothly with no sagging that I get to wear sleeveless tops all summer, something I could never do before, and I'm so happy! An acquaintance told me to just go to TheLINE, so I had surgery without comparing anywhere else, and I'm extremely happy. Above all, thank you so much for recommending and explaining the surgery that was right for me.


At about a month I'm living normally again (honestly from around week 2 I forgot I'd even had lipo haha) there's no swelling and nothing seemed to be coming off anymore so I went huh.., but then I compared photos and, yep, humans really are forgetful hahaha. Good thing I took photos...? Wow, seeing it like this, the before-and-after difference.... I repent for the self that briefly went huh....^^;;;; I had my abdomen + love handles + inner thighs done with Dr. Joongjae Baek, and my weight hasn't changed much, but the pants I wore before giving birth fit again, so I'm having some emotional days..♥️ My only regret is that since I was under anesthesia anyway, I should have done other areas too...haha He doesn't recommend anything unnecessary so I only did what I needed, but I wish I'd been a bit greedier..... That's what I think haha See you next time, off I go ????


The arm lipo I agonized over every time is now at one month. I consulted with Dr. Joongjae Baek and went from booking to surgery in one stop. Along with my arms I had the accessory breast and bra line done, and I'm glad I did them together!! I use my arms for work so I have a fair amount of muscle, and they're not bony arms, but they've gotten a lot thinner. I'm happy. When I stand at attention there's no fat pushing out to the side and they fall straight!! The bra line clearly changed too - when I wear a fitted T-shirt my back line is different. My lines are definitely different when I get dressed. Riding this momentum, I'm going to diet hard before it gets hotter and get even prettier!!!


I had arm, accessory breast and abdominal liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek! Right after surgery it hurt so much that I started and ended every day in tears but it only hurt on the day itself, from day 2 it was bearable, and the bruising was almost gone in about 4 or 5 days Even with the compression garment on right after surgery I could feel my waistline had been shaped, and now that the swelling has gone down it has completely settled in~! I gain weight easily, so fat comes back the moment I slack off, but my waistline stays exactly as it is. I'm honestly so happy. And when I look after myself again it comes back even more clearly Thank you Doctor!


Hello~ A month ago I had abdomen + love handle liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho! I had surgery on Friday and was back at work on Monday, so honestly I was a bit surprised at how fast recovery was. About 2 weeks after surgery I could do light exercise, so I went straight back to golf. 500cc of pure fat was removed, and now I barely feel any lumpiness. And the best part these days is that the pants I already owned have gotten loose. My ab lines are starting to show a little too, so looking in the mirror is fun lately. I plan to keep exercising and build a firmer line. I was a bit worried at first, but now I'm really happy and I've gained a lot of confidence. I'm glad I trusted Dr. Jaeho Cho's skill!


It's been a month since I had abdomen, arm, accessory breast and thigh (saddlebag) liposuction plus hip (hip dip) fat grafting, so I'm writing a review~~ Dr. Yoosuk Chung did all the liposuction and grafting~ Just like others said, from week 3 I could see the swelling dropping fast, and right now it's crept up a bit because of PMS. The really important part is that I'm not even done yet and my weight is the same as before my period, so I'm fully looking forward to my body line in the good phase!! What I notice most is my belly and thighs!! Fat came off my belly and thighs, so why do my legs look longer.. haha I can't believe that was my body only a month ago... hahaha Because a lot was removed, I did get a bit of biobond on the side of my chest and around my navel. But I can feel it easing day by day with aftercare, so I'm not too worried! They said biobond isn't a complication and gets better with time, so I'm waiting with an easy mind. I carry the soft type of fat so I'm doing aftercare at a local shop, and the manager said that in 10 years of post-lipo care she's never seen someone come through lipo as intact as me. Stem cells really do make a difference. After surgery my condition is so good and the swelling keeps dropping, so I'm even starting to think I should have asked them to take more out haha Now at one month, with the good phase coming, I'm going to start dieting. Even without dieting, a blouse whose sleeves used to be so tight I couldn't fold my arms now has a good third of extra room, so I find myself planning a diet on my own. They say it keeps coming off for about 5 months, so at Chuseok this year I'm definitely going out with my arms bared. So excited!!


It's one month since I had my arms, accessory breast, abdomen and love handles done with Dr. Joongjae Baek. At one month I can clearly see the changed lines and there's no discomfort in daily life. Compared to weeks 1-2 the swelling has clearly gone down and you can see how much slimmer I look! I already like it now, but they say the final line takes 3 months, so I'm curious how it will change. There's no pain now, just some stiffness, and I actually find that feeling refreshing, so I stretch often haha Early on I had biobond and bruising around my navel, but maybe thanks to occasionally massaging at home with a self-use radiofrequency device, the bruising and biobond on my belly are all gone. The best part is that my belly isn't squeezed when I sit down in pants, so there's no tightness, and I can wear clothes that didn't fit again. The clothes I wore when my belly stuck out now slide down and sit on my hips! My arms got thinner too, so being able to wear sleeveless tops without embarrassment is really great. There weren't many incisions to begin with and they're not dark now, so in a few months I think they'll be barely visible! Until now I used recovery as an excuse to eat well.. haha Now that moving isn't uncomfortable, I'm going to manage with diet and exercise together!


I thought arms alone would be enough, but I also wanted my accessory breast done, and since I was doing it anyway I wanted the full 360, so the price went up. I was thinking it's a bit expensive, but after my consultation with Dr. Yoosuk Chung I felt good about it. That's how kind and thorough he was. It's been about a month, and with my upper body smaller I look smaller overall - that much is certain. I started dieting too and I can feel myself getting smaller by the day. Doing lipo and dieting together seems to have a booster effect. I wonder why I waited until now to have arm lipo. There's still some residual swelling, so once it's gone I think things will look even more refined.


It's past 3 months since thigh and love handle liposuction with hip dip grafting~ I had it with Dr. Joongjae Baek! It shows in the photos, and I can feel the difference myself, so I'm leaving a review! At first there was no pain at all, maybe because of the anesthesia, and as it gradually wore off it felt about like a bruise in my legs and waist, and after enduring just 1-2 weeks I could go about daily life with no trouble at all! They said combining diet and exercise after surgery makes it come off better, but I did neither... Even so I can feel how much slimmer I am, and I hardly ever wore jeans before but now they fit well so I wear them often!! The surgery went perfectly and there have been no complications at all so far, so I'm completely satisfied❤


I had upper arm and accessory breast treatment, and since I worry a lot about side effects, the aesthetic side mattered but I wanted it done safely! Of the places I looked into, TheLINE uses stem cells in surgery so it seemed safe and I booked right away, and Dr. Yoosuk Chung explained the stem cells in detail as well as the possible side effects and what would be done to minimize them Having gone through it, there really was no pain and hardly any bruising???? I applied bruise cream consistently and it all cleared in 1-2 weeks! Most of all, with so little pain I could return to daily life right away, which was great (I took one day of leave and rested over the weekend!)???? I feel like I had a healthy, safe and beautiful surgery, so I'm extremely happy???? I hesitated for a long time out of fear, but my accessory breast is neatly taken care of and the side bulge that bothered me is gone, so I love it! I know lipo is a surgery you have to view over the long term, so if it's already like this at one month, I'm looking forward to what comes next I regret not having the surgery sooner????


It's been a month since I had thigh liposuction & knee (Chanel line) lipo!! They told me to wear the compression garment 8 hours a day for a month, so for the first two weeks I wore it during the day and took it off at night to sleep, but the compression kept bringing on my low blood pressure, so I went without it during the day and only wore it at night while sleeping! Other than that there was less pain than I expected and not much bruising Which was great since I can't take much time off....haha Right now the treated area is a little lumpy, but they said it loosens with time, and above all, as the swelling goes down the pants that didn't fit are starting to fit, so I'm really happy I had mine with Dr. Joongjae Baek (the youngest doctor!), and the clinic is a bit far from the station (about a 10-minute walk? hahaha), but you can tell from how the coordinator and the doctor talk that they have real experience, so I couldn't not do it... haha The more I see the swelling go down, the greedier I get, so I'm slowly going to start using an indoor bike


It's been 6 months since arm, accessory breast and lower belly liposuction! I was what you'd call skinny fat, so I thought just tidying up the extra flesh would be enough, but after surgery it really was all cleaned up The swelling wasn't severe and there was less bruising than I expected My skin is on the pale side so I was very worried scars would show, but there are two small ones in my armpits, and the lower belly ones are completely hidden by clothes, which is great. Such a relief I'd seen reviews where arm liposuction left scars and lumpiness so the lipo showed and looked worse, and I was worried, but none of that happened at all, so I'm so relieved and endlessly grateful to Dr. Joongjae Baek who did my surgery hahaha The armpit scars have already faded a lot and I think they'll be completely invisible with more time! Right now I exercise once a week, and I'm going to combine it with diet to get even slimmer before summer With the extra flesh cleaned up, there's a synergy when I work out too.. and I feel good wearing workout clothes hahaha


It's my third month since full-front abdominal liposuction Even when I lost a lot of weight my lower belly never went away, so after a lot of thought I had it done! I had it with Dr. Yoongeun Kim~ He explained everything kindly, the atmosphere at the consultation was very relaxed, and their record of no accidents gave me confidence, so I went ahead I didn't do any special diet after surgery, I just cut back on alcohol and snacks! My lower belly, which used to bother me, is definitely tidied up, so getting dressed is easier and a lot of the extra flesh is gone My lower belly used to be lumpy and now it's flat, which I love I got a waistline too haha I'm going to slowly start dieting now He said losing just 3 kilos would define the lines even more clearly, so I'm looking forward to the 6-month mark


Before surgery I was stressed by constant dieting and meal plans and worn out by repeating the cycle, so I thought I really want to stop dieting for good~ and started looking into liposuction. I was worried about side effects, but satisfaction was said to be high and TheLINE's reviews were good, so I went ahead I had thigh and knee line liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek, and in my case it kept gradually coming off up to the 6-month mark, and unlike dieting there was no sagging skin or anything like that, the lines came out beautifully, and getting dressed became fun haha Now there are many times I forget, as if I'd always been slim and never had surgery I'm sooo happy????


It's my sixth month since abdomen and arm liposuction Once I decide to diet I'm good at losing weight, but even after dropping more than 10 kilos my lines were still lumpy, so I always thought 'why does it still look like this even after all that' And I could never maintain it, so the weight always came back When I decided to have liposuction my biggest worry was whether I could maintain it after spending the money.. Removing a lot of fat matters, but I was looking for a doctor who shapes the lines well, and I went with Dr. Jaeho Cho - and 6 months on I'm still very happy Even when I lost a lot of weight it used to come off in unflattering ways, and now when I diet the lines come off beautifully too, and I think it's all thanks to the liposuction I've seen a flat stomach for the first time in my life and worn sleeveless tops, and that makes me even more determined to maintain it I do want to lose more, but I'm afraid of giving in to food and rebounding, so I go back and forth between losing and maintaining haha I wish I'd done it earlier, but I'm glad I did it even now, and I'm going to look after myself even harder


It's been about a month since my arm lift surgery! Right after surgery it hurt even to move my arms a little, and in the very early days it stung and throbbed and just plain hurt even when I was doing nothing. Now! That pain is almost gone Time really is the cure Of course it's still a bit much to use my arms as naturally as before haha Still, there's only slight pain with certain movements, and otherwise I'm going about daily life fine Oh, and when the scar area brushes against something it's not so much a sharp pain as a slight sting, a rough feeling I think this needs a bit more time But I can feel myself recovering more and more~ There's still swelling They say lipo swelling can go down for up to 6 months, and a lift has longer incisions, so I'm accounting for it taking longer, and I know it'll go down if I wait, but I can't help wanting it gone sooner haha Still, seeing the dangling flesh gone with my own eyes, the feeling when I raise or lower my arms is strange, even a bit empty haha The thickness has come down a lot too The doctor said swelling needs at least 3 months to watch, and that the difference in swelling between my arms can happen because the amount removed and the incision sites differ from side to side That makes sense, because my left arm was always bigger hahaha My left arm still has more swelling The conclusion is: my arms as they look now are not the end! I need to give it more time and keep watching So I'm working hard on scar care and walking a lot, hoping the swelling goes down soon~ I'm watching what I eat, drinking plenty of water, and now I'm going to slowly add exercise too haha I'll keep managing consistently and post another review on how the swelling and scars change Still, I think it's this good thanks to the doctor's skill plus the stem cells Rather than rushing, I'm going to enjoy the changes slowly


It's one month since my surgery! I had it with Dr. Jaeho Cho, and with my belly and side fat gone and volume added to my hips, everything I wear looks good, so I love it. Fat was taken from my arms, abdomen, love handles and saddlebags, every corner, and grafted into my hips (hip dips), and day by day the suctioned areas keep slimming down while the grafted area is holding well. At one month my physical condition is back to exactly how it was before surgery, and with all the extra flesh gone I feel so much lighter. I'm already very happy with the hip dip graft area, but I'm having a second session soon so I'm looking forward to it.


It's my third month since 360 arm and accessory breast liposuction! I had it with Dr. Joongjae Baek First of all, looking slimmer to the eye is what I'm happiest about! I swell easily, you see Right after surgery I was so puffy that I doubted whether it had gone well, but time really is the cure,,, haha I've been eating well and gained some back, and even so I'm 3-4 kilos lighter than at the time of surgery! But people around me think I've lost way more than that haha Both family who know about the surgery and acquaintances who don't say I've lost a lot of weight and look delicate I plan to lose more before summer, and since they said it takes 6 months for the surgical swelling to fully go down, I'm going to wait patiently, counting on more to come off!! As the weather warms up clothes get lighter, and I love clothes, so being able to wear what I want without worrying about my upper arms is wonderful. I should have done it sooner.. With the line falling from my shoulders slimmed down, my overall shape comes out prettier, like straight shoulders? So straight shoulders weren't a shoulder problem, I needed to fix my arms,,, hahaha What I remember from the day of surgery is that I had no particular thoughts and wasn't even nervous right up until I went into the operating room, and then while they were sterilizing me I suddenly got scared I wouldn't wake up from the anesthesia So I said, I'm not going to die, right..? I'll wake up, right? and the nurse cheerfully reassured me that they stay right beside patients the whole time so no one fails to wake up So my nerves suddenly eased again After coming out of the operating room I was so out of it that I don't remember much haha I think they brought me water and put a blanket on me when I said I was cold The person who checked my surgical site when I went in for dressing was very kind too and the person who did my aftercare was really, really kind, and the radiofrequency care they do as aftercare felt so good!


Maybe I was built for surgery, because I was moving around well from week 1, and now at 3 months there's no pain and the results are so good???? Before, no matter how much I dieted my thighs never got smaller, and surgery really was the answer hahaha I had my abdomen, love handles and inner and outer thighs done, and the lumpy outer thigh line is completely tidied up, and since I did the abdomen at the same time, doesn't my hip line look prettier too, almost like I had grafting done haha After surgery, fat that never used to come off started coming off, so I ate freely and gained a bit but my abdomen and thighs barely gained and the lines didn't go back to how they were before surgery I should manage a little before summer arrives!


One month after my arm liposuction revision + arm lift~! Maybe because a whole month has gone by, the swelling is almost all down and I can really feel how much my arm line has been cleaned up. Since the arm liposuction was a revision I had to be extra careful choosing a clinic, but looking back I think I chose really well!! I had the lift done together because of the sagging skin on the inner side, and now nothing droops when I raise my arm, and when I lower it there is no skin bunching up either, so my arms look much thinner down at my sides too! The pain was almost gone by the one-month mark, though I still get an occasional throbbing feeling. It has not fully settled yet so certain movements are still a little uncomfortable! They told me that goes away with time, so I am not worried hehe. People around me say I look completely different and ask where my arm fat went haha. They say the scars fade almost completely by around a year, so I am looking forward to that. Once I decided on the lift I accepted the scar as a long-term trade-off anyway, so I am applying ointment and plan to try scar laser later. For this kind of result with this kind of scar, I would do it again even if I went back in time!


At first there was quite a bit of swelling and a heavy feeling left in my inner arms and armpit area, but now both the swelling and the heaviness are almost gone and my arm line looks much more natural! This was my first surgery like this so I assumed I would have to lie down for about a week after arm liposuction, but it was much less of a deal than I expected?hahaha From day 4 I went everywhere I needed to go and moved around just like before surgery haha With the extra arm fat gone my whole arm obviously looks thinner, and it even looks longer haha Clothes definitely fit better after the surgery so I am sooooo happy with it I keep thinking I should have done it sooner! I am at 3 months and they said the line will keep refining, so I am going to take care of myself along with it I will come back and leave another review once more swelling goes down!!


I cannot believe the day has come to write my one-month review ~~ It has been a month since I had what you could almost call full-body liposuction - abdomen, arms, inner thighs - plus fat grafting into my hip dips After a month the bruising is completely gone and the swelling has come down a lot Especially!! I can see how much the waistline has slimmed down and I am so happy with it My stomach is completely flat now My back slimmed down a lot too, and my friend told me my whole body looks slimmer and prettier In my case the swelling went down at different speeds depending on the area! My upper arms and thighs still seem more swollen than my stomach, but compared to before surgery they are much slimmer A few days ago I saw the doctor for my one-month check and he said there is still some swelling They say liposuction is all about waiting it out...haha so I think it will keep going down over time! I am already happy since I have hip curves now, but at the 3-month mark I am thinking about doing a second round of fat grafting. They say human greed has no end, and I think it would be nice to have a bit more shape If I do end up getting it, I will post another review hehe


It has been 6 months since Dr. Jaeho Cho did my thigh liposuction and knee (Chanel line) liposuction~ Now that the thigh fat that stressed me out so much is gone, my quality of life has gone up and I feel confident. I even tried on tight pants and the line came out so nicely that I am really happy I am more satisfied with the knee liposuction area than I expected I think that is what made my legs look straighter Even right after surgery I could go about my daily life, with nothing more than a dull ache. The bruising and swelling went down quickly, there is barely any scarring, and because it was stem cell liposuction the recovery was clearly fast, which I loved I recommend it so much


I gained weight fast over the past 2 years, and after only thinking about liposuction for ages I finally got lipo and fat grafting done It has been 1 month since arm, love handle and thigh liposuction plus hip fat grafting It was my first surgery and I wanted it done properly in one go without a revision, so I requested Chief Director Dr. Jaeho Cho for the surgery, and Dr. Yoosuk Chung did the grafting First of all, the pain was better than I expected! There is a slight pulling feeling, but from about a week in I was living normally again, and the swelling only lasted about a week before going down quickly I am only at 1 month so there is still some residual swelling, but the lines are definitely cleaner The side bulges on my arms are gone so they look slim, my bulging love handles are tidied up, and when I touch my hips I can feel the difference from before They say residual swelling goes down over 3 to 6 months, so I am going to manage the swelling carefully and diet hard~~!!


This is my successful upper arm lipo review at 1 month post-op!!! Dr. Yoosuk Chung operated on March 10!! Before my consultation I was only thinking about my upper arms and accessory breast tissue and had no idea other areas could be done together, so I never even considered it, but I ended up doing the armpit area and upper arm root too!! Both the manager and the doctor said we should go ahead with the upper arms and accessory breast tissue since mine was so pronounced, but for the upper arm root and armpit they recommended doing them together while saying it was not essential and I could think it over and decide There was no pressure at all, just information, so I thought about it for exactly one day. I wondered whether the armpit fat and upper arm root would end up standing out by comparison, and since I cannot do this twice I wanted it done properly the one time!! So I decided to do it all, and it really feels like the right choice They said the swelling is not fully down yet since I am only at one month, but how can the line already be this pretty ㅜㅜㅜ There is none of the muscle bunching people call 'babon' or anything like that, and honestly I cannot even feel any swelling, but if there really is still swelling left then I have even more to look forward to Oh!! And the aftercare therapist was truly the kindest, I learned so much from her and thanks to the little bits of small talk going in for care never felt like a chore. It was so nice❤️ Thank you!!


Dr. Yoongeun Kim did my stem cell abdomen and love handle liposuction! By week 3 the bruising on my stomach was gone and had moved down to my thighs, and now there is almost no bruising left I am at one month now! My stomach feels much flatter and it looks that way too I did the love handles together so the fat on my back went down as well, and when I tried on the pants I wore before surgery the back rode up Overall my stomach is flatter, my back has come in, and it feels like I finally have a waistline~ My sister even told me my waist has come in Maybe it was the 'babon' hardening, but my lower belly had gotten firm like a workout knot. I mentioned it during my radiofrequency care session and they massaged the lower belly intensively, so it loosened up a lot I have almost no pain or discomfort, so I even go running Recovery was fast, there was almost no discomfort in daily life right after surgery, and I can already see a lot of results at one month, so I am happy~~


I am 3 months out from my stem cell facelift. Compared to one month, my jawline is even sharper, the cheek muscles near my molars move naturally, and I can open my mouth wider. Everyone who sees me says my face has slimmed down and looks sharper, and now that the jowls and double chin are gone they say I look softer and 10 years younger^^ Nothing was particularly uncomfortable, and I kept applying sunscreen and scar regeneration cream regularly. So at 3 months the scars are barely visible. They were already hard to see because the surgery was done precisely along my hairline, and after caring for them and letting time pass they are almost invisible, which I love. Even after surgery they check on my progress and any discomfort at all times and answer questions kindly, so I really think TheLINE Plastic Surgery does aftercare very well. At my follow-ups Dr. Yoosuk Chung examined the surgical area thoroughly, and every time I visited the nurses, the manager and Dr. Yoosuk Chung all treated me kindly, so I could come and go with peace of mind, which was the best part of all


I happened to see a YouTube video about clinics that do facial fat grafting well, and seeing the doctor himself explaining it built my trust. I thought doing it with stem cells would be better, so I visited for a consultation Dr. Yoosuk Chung saw me and pinpointed exactly the areas of my face I had been worried about, which convinced me he really is an experienced doctor, so I went ahead with full-face fat grafting right away It has been 3 months since my facial fat grafting. Maybe because the result came out so natural, I have been told a lot that I look prettier When I say natural I do not mean it is unnoticeable - it is that nothing looks artificially puffed up, yet my whole impression has changed I used to get so annoyed hearing that I looked tired or that I had lost weight These days I hear a lot that my face looks good, which makes me so happy, and I feel like getting the fat grafting was the right call I have recommended it to plenty of people I know^^


My calves were always slim but I had a lot of thigh fat so I could never wear short clothes. After liposuction the line falls beautifully from the thigh down! I had thigh and Chanel line liposuction, and for the first few days after surgery it felt uncomfortable, like sore muscles after a hard workout, but after that I got by with no discomfort When I show people my before and after photos they ask where I had it done and want to get it too I am happy with my thigh liposuction and I recommend it!


This is my review 6 months after abdominal liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek If I could go back in time I would have had the surgery sooner Early on I had some 'babon' hardening so I worried about side effects, but they explained that it is not a side effect, which put my mind at ease and my abdominal fat has clearly gone down a lot so I am happy My weight has not changed since surgery, but I definitely gain less around the abdomen Recovery was smoother than I had feared and my lower abdomen slimmed down too, so I am very satisfied


Dr. Jungjae Baek did my thigh and Chanel line liposuction My thighs were my biggest complex, and he recommended the Chanel line too so I did them together. Looking at it now, it really was exactly the surgery I needed. His eye for it is something else hehe I was 80kg before surgery and these days I stay in the low 70s! Weight aside, the way my body looks in the mirror is completely different after surgery When I wear leggings or fitted pants I definitely have a thigh gap now, so the line looks so pretty Some swelling came back because of year-end dinners, but I started PT and a diet again to keep the line! Even so, my weight does not really go up My quality of life changed so much after surgery that I am glad I did it before summer arrived Summer is hard because of the compression garment, so if you are considering it I recommend getting it done before summer!!


On December 6 last year Dr. Jaeho Cho did my stem cell thigh liposuction and knee (Chanel line liposuction), and about 4 months have passed. The firm, uncomfortable feeling from the early days is almost completely gone and my jeans fit so nicely that I am extremely satisfied. I have lived my whole life without a gap between my thighs, and now they will not touch even if I try to force it, they slimmed down so nicely. To everyone hesitating over surgery like I did! I have had liposuction at another clinic before, and maybe because this is the stem cell method the recovery is clearly faster, so instead of spending time agonizing over it, I recommend just getting the surgery!!


After agonizing over it forever, here is my 6-month arm lipo review!! I have never weighed over 50kg so I am not a heavy build, but my upper arms always bothered me ㅜㅜ My parents and boyfriend were against it, plus the vague anxiety around liposuction and worries about scars and side effects, so I just dieted endlessly instead ㅜㅠ Even after getting down to the low 40s my upper arms did not change at all hahaha I decided on arm liposuction, looked around everywhere, and went with Dr. Jungjae Baek. I am now at 6 months and the satisfaction only gets higher as time passes!!!! On the doctor's recommendation I did the arms, accessory breast tissue and the area behind the armpits, and I recently went on a trip to a warm country and walked around in tank tops and a bikini. Honestly it is the surgery I have been most satisfied with after LASIK!!!! There is only one scar on the inner side of each armpit, so my parents still do not even know I had liposuction hahaha I also loved the doctor's mindset - he aims for safe surgery and says he would rather do two sessions than overdo it and risk side effects!! I had a lot of worries about liposuction side effects, and one of the reasons I went ahead was that there was a doctor with this kind of mindset. In the end, very satisfied!!!! I am so happy with it that now I want to do my inner thighs too hahahaha


I was hesitating about liposuction, had a consultation with Dr. Jungjae Baek and went ahead with surgery! I did the whole upper body - arms, accessory breast tissue, abdomen and back Since there were many areas and my weight was high, I also had an autologous blood transfusion It is not mandatory, but they said that when a large volume of fat is removed it definitely helps with post-op anemia and recovery, so I did it, and afterwards I was glad I had. Even though they removed a lot, around 6700cc, I came out of the anesthesia quickly and cleanly and my condition that day was fine! Before surgery, Manager Inbi Hwang and Dr. Jungjae Baek gave me a detailed and honest consultation and explained the surgical method and the recovery process, which made me trust them more. Right after waking from anesthesia there was pain, but for me it was bearable! They say stem cells speed up recovery, and sure enough the swelling went down day by day and the bruising faded sooner than I expected. Now the swelling is down so much that you would not notice anything even with all my clothes off, and the lines are visibly different,, I used to carry a lot of weight so I worried a lot about sagging skin, but there is none of that at all and my stomach is completely flat. I worried so much before surgery, but now I am really satisfied!! I am only at one month, so thinking about how much more will go down, I am excited!


One month since my arm liposuction!! I was happy with everything from the service to the procedure so I am leaving a review heh First of all, the most important thing for me was being able to get back to daily life quickly, and maybe because this clinic uses the stem cell method, recovery really was fast..!! Dr. Jungjae Baek operated on me and he is so well known for liposuction hehe I definitely felt glad I had it done here heh Maybe because the surgery went well, from the very first day up to the one-month mark I experienced my condition improving dramatically day by day..!!hahaha That was the amazing part..I would wake up feeling much better than the day before.. then the next day the bruising was completely gone, then the swelling went down.. hehe The recovery alone deserves full credit I did the accessory breast tissue along with the arms. I had not really thought about it, but the extra cost was not much so I added it. Total win They said it takes about 6 months for the full effect to show, but at one month the line is already coming together and I have no pain, so I am satisfied already hahaha And I even wonder, more is going to come off..? hehe There is also body care after surgery..! I already had one session and they took great care of the lines and the tight spots hahaha It felt so good The service is great too heh and the staff are super kind and thorough, which I liked even more..! I felt it from the consultation on, but this place gave a strongly professional impression heh If you can get the result you want with as little strain on your body as possible.. that is great, right? hehe I hope this helps everyone who is considering liposuction~


I love that my upper body, which used to look bulky, now looks slender! Dr. Jaeho Cho did my surgery and he took my original body shape into account and slimmed me down beautifully~~ The manager said it keeps improving up to 6 months, and sure enough it keeps slimming down and settling nicely as time goes by Dieting along with it after surgery seems to make the effect show even more! Thank you so much, doctor!!!


It has been a month since my abdomen and love handle liposuction~ I have had 1 radiofrequency aftercare session and have 1 left~ Up to week 3 there was still a lot of 'babon' hardening, but after just one radiofrequency session it clearly went down a lot~ Aside from a bit of that hardening, the bruising faded quickly and the swelling seems to be going down fast~ I see other people whose purple bruising lasts a long time, but maybe because it was stem cell surgery, it feels like my recovery was faster I have a short torso and a fairly prominent ribcage so I did not expect much, but I have a waistline now, and jeans that would not zip up now close easily!! And the way my stomach used to stick out enormously when I sat down has visibly improved~ I can still feel a little hardening, and once even that goes away it will slim down more, so with the warm weather coming I think dressing up is going to be a joy????


After consultations at several places I had my arm and accessory breast tissue liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho!! Now that 3 months have passed I am so, so satisfied hehe First of all, at 3 months the swelling has gone down a lot so it feels like liposuction is finally showing its true value If you are not sure early on, be patient and wait, you will get more and more satisfied..hahaha People around me do not know I had surgery but they often say I look slimmer these days, and since the liposuction, whatever I wear, the line from my shoulder down my arm has no lumps or bumps at all and makes such a pretty fit, so I am so, so happy ㅠㅠ I cannot wait for summer ㅠㅠ My arms were not even especially thick or fatty, and yet I am really feeling the before-and-after difference hehe


A month ago Dr. Jungjae Baek did my thigh and Chanel line liposuction. In January I had my arms and abdomen done first with Dr. Baek and I was so happy with it that I booked and had the lower body done right away! Manager Boyoung Jung gave me a kind consultation that fit my budget, which is how I was able to decide on surgery and I am so satisfied with the lower body as well~ The pain right after surgery was more bearable than with the abdomen, and from 2 days later I could go about daily life with no problem. From right after surgery through the first month the swelling went down and I lost about 4kg without exercising, and the pants I used to wear got loose. My thighs were my worry and exercise never slimmed them, so I am really satisfied!! Aftercare after surgery is 2 sessions in total - 1 radiofrequency and 1 thermal care. From the consultation through the aftercare all the staff were kind, so it is a place that puts me in a good mood every time I visit. I totally recommend it!!


I was never really heavy, more on the thin side, but whenever I ate or evening came around only my lower belly would stick out and it stressed me out so much that I decided on surgery I had thigh liposuction years ago too, but I picked the wrong clinic so the line came out uneven and lumpy ㅠ If the first surgery goes wrong a revision is extremely difficult, and I do not have much fat left to operate on, so I was extremely careful choosing a clinic for this abdominal surgery The reason I chose TheLINE among them is that I had already had a bad experience with thigh liposuction where they just removed fat without thought, so I looked for a surgical method least likely to cause that kind of problem Other clinics told me surgery was not possible because I am on the thin side, but TheLINE said that because they operate with the stem cell method there are fewer side effects and surgery was possible, so I chose them Since I was doing the abdomen anyway, I added love handle liposuction and hip dip grafting Dr. Jaeho Cho did the liposuction and Dr. Yoosuk Chung did the grafting And unexpectedly a lot of fat was harvested, so they said there was fat left over after the grafting and that I could do full-face fat grafting or other procedures later, which was so touching ㅠㅠㅠ..... I gained quite a bit after surgery and came back to a normal weight, but my waist stays around 25-26 inches and does not go up I do not gain in the abdomen anymore, so I am happy. Good good


Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my abdomen, love handle and thigh liposuction plus breast and hip fat grafting~ I am at 1 month now I saw that bruising lasts a long time for some people so I worried it would for me too, but almost all the bruising is gone It faded faster than I expected, which was surprising I worried about the line because of the early swelling, but the more time passes the better it shows!! For liposuction they said you have to wait at least 3 months, and I think that is true The grafted areas have settled naturally as the swelling went down and are holding nicely If it looks like this at only 1 month, the effect will show even better as more time passes, so I am looking forward to what comes next


After liposuction I ended up with excessive hollowing in my thighs and sagging buttocks, so I looked into inner thigh liposuction revision and hip liposuction and finally had the surgery I figured that if the second attempt went wrong there would be no going back, so I looked into stem cells and had the surgery with Dr. Jungjae Baek Unlike other clinics that said the buttocks had to be shaved down entirely, he said that touching the buttocks makes them sag and that surgery should be done safely, only to the point where the shape does not collapse I had the inner thigh revision plus saddlebag and hip line liposuction, and now a lot of the inner thigh fat is gone and I even have a thigh gap! My lower body line overall is much cleaner, and the hollowing that stressed me out every time I looked at it is gone, so my quality of life has gone way up ㅠㅠ


Posting my arm and accessory breast tissue liposuction review! I was a bride-to-be before the surgery so I was worried about marks, but TheLINE only makes two incisions and they said that with stem cells the scars fade quickly, so I went ahead Thanks to Dr. Jungjae Baek keeping the scars invisible and shaping everything smoothly with no lumps, my wedding in February went great and everyone was making a fuss about how thin I looked hehe With a pretty line now, I feel proud every time I look in the mirror or wear a fitted top Satisfied, satisfied, super satisfied!!! Now I want to do my thighs too ㅜㅠㅠㅠ


I had arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek! I am at one month and very satisfied At the one-month mark the swelling had clearly gone down and the line came out beautifully I was worried about the swelling, but I guess with liposuction you really do have to wait hehehe The line on the back of my arms especially came out so pretty that every time I look I think I am so glad I did it! From the consultation on, the doctor said I would definitely be very satisfied, and he was right, it is the best ㅠ I did not do the accessory breast tissue, only the upper arms, but with the arm fat gone there is no longer anything pressing on that area so the line there tidied up naturally too! That was one of the biggest bonus points!!! I did not have much pain or stiffness. Other than a bit of a pulling feeling when I stretched upward, there was almost nothing!


It has been 1 month since my arm and accessory breast tissue liposuction Dr. Jaeho Cho did it! The bruising was all gone after about a week, and I took 3 days off after surgery just in case, but I think you could go back to daily life right away Maybe because it was stem cell liposuction, the pain was not as bad as I expected and the swelling went down quickly, so it never got in the way of daily life I met Dr. Jaeho Cho at the consultation and the way he spoke was trustworthy. It seemed like he would not over-suction or push an excessive surgery, which is why I chose him His long experience was part of why I chose him too He seems like a precise person I am only at 1 month so this is not the final result, but the side bulges that made me look bigger from behind have gone down a lot and the accessory breast area is much tidier, so I am happy I asked the consultation manager and she said swelling keeps going down until 3 months, so if more comes off I might even be able to hope for a straight arm line


I had arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek~! By now it feels completely natural, as if my arms were always like this! I had upper arm liposuction once 3-4 years ago but the effect was minimal, and even after that I could never wear sleeveless tops. So my arms were still a source of stress, and while I was considering liposuction again I found out about TheLINE Plastic Surgery. The reviews were good so I booked right away and came in for a consultation. What felt different from other clinics was that even the manager had professional knowledge, and when she talked about recovery through stem cells she said the swelling goes down slowly at first but surely, and only now do I understand what she meant. There are no visible scars, it is seamless. And Dr. Jungjae Baek eased my anxiety about a revision, which reassured me. So I decided to have the area around the arms suctioned as well while doing the upper arms! On the day of the procedure I got my prescription in advance, and when I came in they guided me through everything. I was scared at first, but I opened my eyes, got up, and it was already over. Now the swelling is completely gone and I go on trips wearing swimsuits and sleeveless tops!! I recommend it so much!!


It has already been over 6 months since my arm, accessory breast tissue and abdomen liposuction!! I had my surgery with Chief Director Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE, which is top of the top for body contouring and liposuction and fat grafting! Up to the one-month mark I kept wishing I would recover fast so I could take off the compression garment, and now it is already 6 months hehe No need for long explanations, is the before and after not amazing...hahaha Honestly, in my before photo I had already dieted and lost some weight, but looking at it now that was not the case at all...hehe After surgery, whenever I break down and binge, a few days of watching my diet takes it right back off and the line looks even better ㅠㅠ The fat I used to be able to grab by the handful is no longer there, and when I lie down or shower I can feel bones. A bit creepy but also a good feeling hee There is not much time left before summer, so I want to get the areas I am eyeing done before then.. If I do, I will absolutely go to Dr. Jaeho Cho If you are still scared and hesitating, and if your complex is severe and you are stressed because exercise just will not take it off, I think I would recommend it The pain is less than you would think, and it varies from person to person, but with stem cells the bruising is not very bad and recovery is really fast! I strongly, strongly recommend it!


It has been 3 months since my abdomen and love handle liposuction hehe Dr. Jungjae Baek did it and he was extremely thorough with both the consultation and the surgery! With the doctor's skill plus the stem cell surgery, recovery was fast and there is definitely no sagging feeling!! The pain only lasted about 3 days I think. And no navel drooping either A waistline I never had before appeared after surgery, and the side line came out just right, so I love it If you are considering it, I totally recommend it


It has been one month since my arm lift and arm liposuction so I am posting a review!! My upper arms have been exceptional since I was young ㅠ I went up to 100kg, lost 30kg, then gained 10kg back with the yo-yo, and while other areas did not sag much my arms were especially bad. Dieting never changed my arms, and when buying clothes I had to shop by armhole size ㅠㅠ It stressed me out so much that at first I was searching for arm liposuction reviews, then realized there is such a thing as an arm lift I read a lot of reviews and did a ton of digging on clinics, but there are not many clinics that do lifts well ㅠ Then I found out about TheLINE and had a consultation, and once I was actually there I learned that with stem cells the scarring can be minimized, and the doctor has a lot of experience with lifts, so I trusted them and went ahead right away hehe Dr. Yoongeun Kim did the arm liposuction and Dr. Jaeho Cho did the lift After the arm liposuction + lift, all the clothes that would not go on because of the loose skin now fit ㅠㅠㅠ The swelling keeps going down day by day and my arms are getting slimmer, and the surgery was done so well that the scars look fine, so I am really satisfied All that droopy hanging skin is gone and I am so happy The scars are hard to see unless I raise my arms, and if I keep caring for them I think they will fade more and more If you have upper arms like mine, I strongly recommend an arm lift ㅠㅠ


Once I decided on lift surgery I chose TheLINE based on the doctor's skill What I liked most was that there was no pressure about the surgery and they gave me the choice, so from the consultation through the surgery I could decide with peace of mind My concern was sagging skin more than fat thickness, so we decided on liposuction + a two-stage lift incision running from mid-upper-arm to the armpit As for the operating time, preparation started at 9 and it was around 2:30 when it finished Thickness aside, having no dangling skin is wonderful. After nothing but stress over sagging skin, a lift really is a whole new world


My under-eyes were always dark so I looked tired, like I had been crying. I thought dark circles were simply the cause, and no matter how thickly I layered concealer under my eyes it would not cover, which stressed me out so much. A friend recommended TheLINE so I went for a consultation, and Dr. Yoosuk Chung explained that this was not simply a dark circle problem, but that the under-eye groove was protruding and casting a shadow that affected the overall impression of my face. I had assumed dark circles were the cause, so learning the root cause so clearly was such a relief, and I was so grateful to think I could finally solve the problem ㅜㅜ!! Everyone around me says it turned out so well, and hearing it from several people a day makes me so proud and happy hehehe I go out without concealer now Also, the incision was made through the conjunctiva so there is no scar, which I love hehe My boyfriend and my family also say it turned out great and ask why I did not do it sooner.. I am just glad I did it now. I am really, really satisfied. It is not an obvious surgery, yet the change is remarkable. If your face looks tired even with makeup on, or you feel like you look hollow, definitely get it done. Dr. Yoosuk Chung, thank you so much hehe I saw that he has 28 years of experience. These days a lot of young doctors do double eyelid surgery, but nothing beats long experience for trustworthiness The staff at the front desk were so kind and guided me well, keeping me from getting nervous right up to the moment of surgery, thank you hehe The consultation manager explained everything in a way that was easy to understand, and the facilities were clean, so I was satisfied with everything. The best!


My arms have always been especially thick so nothing I wore looked good and I looked bulky, which bothered me!!ㅠ After a long time thinking it over I decided to get liposuction and did a ton of research, Stem cell fat was unfamiliar to me at first, but when I looked into it I read that it is very safe during surgery and that recovery is faster than with other surgeries, so I went with TheLINE, which is famous for stem cell liposuction and fat grafting And I picked my doctor after reading a lot of reviews! (I had it done by Dr. Jungjae Baek) He found the line that suits my body and explained things during the consultation without any pressure, so I felt comfortable! I did the upper arm root and accessory breast tissue along with the arm liposuction, and I am so glad I added those... Anyone getting arm liposuction, please do the upper arm root and accessory breast tissue together..hehehe I am at one month now and recovery is clearly faster than in the reviews I read from other clinics. I can already raise my arms all the way and I am living with no discomfort! Most of all the swelling has gone down a lot and the line has become really pretty ㅠ ㅠㅠ Now I am going to diet hard and make the line even prettier~! I will post another review later!


I had hip fat grafting after arm and thigh liposuction I had already had hip fat grafting at another clinic using fat from my abdomen, but the hips absorbed almost all of it so you could barely tell, and the marks on my abdomen still had not gone away. While I was upset about that, at TheLINE they took fat from my upper arms and, since it was not enough, a bit more from my thighs and placed it into my hips. Maybe because they took a moderate amount it looks natural, and unlike last time the damage was not severe, so I rested a week and went about my daily life fine The volume placed into my hips was less than last time, yet more of it actually survived when it was done at TheLINE The aftercare follow-up calls were kind and I was well taken care of, it was great I really regret not coming here in the first place.. From the consultation manager to the staff who help with the photos, everyone was so kind and there is almost no waiting time If you are considering liposuction for body contouring and are worried about side effects or surgical accidents, I strongly recommend TheLINE I am even considering a revision at TheLINE for my abdomen


I am one month post-op! I had love handle liposuction, thigh and saddlebag liposuction and hip fat grafting, and there was almost no swelling and the bruising disappeared quickly~ The lumpy lines on my hips and thighs from before surgery are tidied up and smooth now and the hip grafting took well so my hip dips are corrected and I have volume!! I love the overall line too ㅠ They say fat survival is good with stem cells, and so far it is holding well, which is a relief ㅠㅠ Please do not go away!!haha Dr. Jungjae Baek did it. His consultation was detailed and his manner was so good, and the surgical result is satisfying as well! They say TheLINE does the waist to saddlebags procedure well, and I think I understand why that is their main one hehe If your body shape before surgery is similar to mine, I recommend getting a consultation hehe


Week 1 after my liposuction and fat grafting! I had a consultation with Dr. Yoosuk Chung and his explanations and everything else were so good that I booked and had the surgery right away! My concerns were flat hips, saddlebags and uneven breasts Since I was doing it anyway I also said I wanted my thighs slimmer The bruising startled me at first but it faded faster than I expected For three days I could not really look at my body so I did not know, but the lines definitely feel tidied up Comparing it in photos like this makes it even clearer, which is amazing I had been unsure about the love handles, but I am glad I followed the recommendation I did not want anything excessive, and if I had skipped the love handles I think the line would not have come out as well, so I am so happy the doctor pointed out exactly that area and recommended it My breast asymmetry is corrected and the shape is prettier too, so I am satisfied! I will post another review once more swelling goes down!!


It has been a month since my arm liposuction!! For about two weeks the stiffness made it a bit uncomfortable, but the pain was bearable and I could get back to daily life quickly There was less bruising on the surgical area than I expected, and the bruising that traveled down actually lasted longer, but it was winter so I wore long sleeves and it was fine hehe I am at about a month now, the tight spots have loosened a lot and the bulges sticking out on both sides are much tidier, which I like What I liked most was that they make only one incision on the inner side, which is why I chose TheLINE, and maybe thanks to the stem cells recovery is fast, and even at only a month I like the line!! I am going to exercise and take care of myself to get even slimmer The swelling is not completely gone yet, so once that goes down too I think I will be even slimmer


It has been 1 month since surgery For liposuction I did love handles, abdomen and saddlebags, and I had hip fat grafting Apart from the grafted area I do not feel a big effect yet, but they say it keeps improving up to 3 months so I am waiting The service depends on how booked the day is - sometimes it is good, sometimes it is a bit chaotic Maybe because it was a stem cell procedure, recovery was fast The aftercare therapists are kind


One month after my arm liposuction~ I did the upper arms, the upper arm root, accessory breast tissue and below the armpits, and even though it has only been a month and I only did my arms, people keep telling me I have lost a lot of weight~!! It makes me regret all the time I spent at home pinching, massaging and getting injections... I should have done it sooner haha Because of the fat under my armpits, wearing sleeveless tops meant skin rubbing against skin and getting uncomfortable when I sweated, but once that came off the discomfort disappeared too.. It turns out it was not something I just had to live with..haha Why did I wait until now!! They told me swelling can last up to 3 months, and just when I think all my swelling is gone, looking at photos it is subtle but week 3 looks different from month 1. There is a difference only I can spot. hehe There is still some time before it gets really hot, right? If you are considering arm liposuction, go to Dr. Jungjae Baek at TheLINE right away!!


Hello! This is my arm lift and arm liposuction review It has been about 4 months and recently even more has come off, so I came to write a review hehe Before surgery I was 152cm and 43kg so I was not heavy, but I had a lot of upper arm fat and a bulging sagging part near my armpits that really bothered me, so after a long time thinking about it I had arm liposuction and an arm lift together Dr. Jungjae Baek did the arm liposuction and Dr. Jaeho Cho did the arm lift! They told me the sagging part on the inner arm is hard to flatten with liposuction alone ㅠ Doing the lift together got rid of the bulge on the inner side, what a relief ㅠㅠ The thickness is visibly reduced and the line is much cleaner, and it even feels like I gained some firmness^^ Maybe that is because of the stem cells With a lift there is inevitably a long scar, so the scar was my biggest worry, but the incision line was done neatly and it is healing well The scar is not even short, yet it is so neat!! I guess you really cannot dismiss the doctor's experience..hehehe My weight is the same 43kg before and after surgery, but my appearance and lines changed so much that it feels like I succeeded at a diet^^ So these days I am also working out with more focus on my lines~!hehe Once winter ends and spring comes with lighter clothes, I am going to wear lots of prettier outfits!! I hope my review helps anyone who is hesitating and worrying^^ [Source] ☆Arm Lipo + Arm Lift Review☆ (Yeouya Beauty Cafe (Plastic Surgery/Cosmetics/Surgery Reviews/Events/Testers)) | Posted by aeji09 [Source] ☆Arm Lipo + Arm Lift Review☆ (Yeouya Beauty Cafe (Plastic Surgery/Cosmetics/Surgery Reviews/Events/Testers)) | Posted by aeji09 [Source] ☆Arm Lipo + Arm Lift Review☆ (Yeouya Beauty Cafe (Plastic Surgery/Cosmetics/Surgery Reviews/Events/Testers)) | Posted by aeji09


A month ago I had stem cell liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek (arms, accessory breast tissue, armpits, upper arm root, abdomen, love handles). I booked a consultation, was assigned to Manager Jung and had my consultation with Manager Boyoung Jung. I went in planning to do only my arms, but I had put on quite a bit of weight and secretly wanted my abdomen done too, and Manager Boyoung Jung fit the cost to my budget so nicely that I decided to include the abdomen, and I think it was a very good choice. They say you can request a specific manager when booking a consultation - everyone, request Manager Boyoung Jung!!! She is so kind and accommodating ㅠㅠ What I liked about liposuction at TheLINE Plastic Surgery was the number of incisions. I understand that at other clinics upper arm liposuction often involves an incision at the elbow that leaves a scar, but at TheLINE Plastic Surgery the whole arm is done through a single opening on the inner armpit, which I liked most. When I visited for the consultation all the staff and coordinators were so kind that it was a clinic that put me in a good mood. They explained the precautions well the day before surgery, and on the day I came in nervous, met Dr. Jungjae Baek, had the markings done and had the surgery. When Dr. Jungjae Baek does the markings he tailors them to your skin elasticity, stretch marks and so on, so that the arm skin does not end up loose. Before surgery the nurses helped me relax, and since it was done under sedation the surgery itself was not painful, but as the anesthesia wore off there was pain in my abdomen ㅠㅠ Still, that is something you have to endure ㅠㅠㅠ The next morning Manager Boyoung Jung called to check on me and told me a total of 3900cc of fat had been suctioned from my upper body. When I looked up arm reviews many people said they could not lift their arms the next day, but there was none of that for me and the bruising was not severe either. For the abdomen, until day 2.. it hurt lying down, sitting and standing.. I had a rough time, but from day 3 I went back to work and daily life was completely possible~ Maybe because it was stem cell liposuction, recovery felt fast. They say it takes at least 3 to 6 months for the swelling and skin firmness to come back, so I am going to take care of myself while dieting alongside it. To anyone agonizing over liposuction, agonizing is a waste of time ㅠㅠ I am completely satisfied with this procedure!! Start with a consultation~~


Leaving my 4-month review after arm, accessory breast and lower belly lipo! Dr. Jungjae Baek did my surgery. Because it was the stem cell type it cost a bit more than I had budgeted, but recovery was fast and above all the scars are so narrow and healed so quickly that I think they will be invisible once more time passes hehe (another clinic's doctor even asked me where I had it done....) I am naturally on the slim side so I worried it would not show, but my accessory breast area got tidied up too and I love it, and the belly was the one thing that never went away no matter what I did, so surgery really was the answer hehehe Highly recommend!


It has already been over a month since Dr. Jungjae Baek at TheLINE Plastic Surgery did my abdomen and love handle liposuction. Before surgery I wondered if it was dangerous, after surgery I thought I would feel alive just taking the compression garment off, and I worried the BioBond felt too hard. I had so many worries, but now I am free. Of course some swelling and BioBond are still there, but I do not mind and just live happily without thinking about it. The scars are getting lighter as I apply ointment every day, though they look a little darker right after a shower. I think time will take care of everything. If you are running around researching like I was a month ago and you read this review, I strongly recommend it!


It has been a week since I had lipo at TheLINE. I went to four clinics for consultations, and the first reason I chose this one was that I liked the incision sites the most. The second reason was that there was no pressure to decide during the consultation, and hearing that I was welcome to consult other clinics before deciding earned my trust. The third reason was that I expected fast recovery from the stem cell liposuction technique! Dr. Jungjae Baek performed my surgery and I had abdomen and love handle liposuction. I was not very heavy before surgery, but I have a short waist, so even when I worked out my belly and side fat looked bulky, and it bothered me. I felt I had hit a limit with dieting, so I decided on surgery. For anyone still deciding, I will write down how I personally felt starting from the day of surgery (I also read a lot of reviews and worried before mine, so I hope this helps you decide) I fell asleep for the surgery and woke up lying in the recovery room in a compression garment, and the pain on day one was less than I expected!! After surgery I went home, ate a burger set, and because I wanted to recover fast I even took about an hour's walk that evening (at a very, very slow sloth pace). I weighed myself and it was 50kg! The next day and the day after that there was some pain, and getting up from sitting or lying down was hard. It felt like really bad muscle soreness. I tried to get up using only my lower body strength, and since the surgical area was my abdomen, laughing hurt, coughing or sneezing really hurt, and I could not push when going to the bathroom From day 5 it got a bit better, and now at one week I am 46kg!! The same weight as before surgery, but can you see how much my body shape has changed? I really do recommend liposuction.... I wonder why I waited so long. Pain was what I worried about most, but it was honestly manageable and it did not get in the way of daily life.


It has already been a month since my arm liposuction! hehe Dr. Yoongeun Kim did it, and I decided right away because there is no elbow incision, they use stem cells, the doctor's experience, and because he gave such a detailed and professional consultation. The result was definitely the right choice hehehehe I am the type whose fat collects in the upper arms, so no matter what I wore I looked heavier than my actual weight. He said that for a straight arm line it would be better to treat the accessory breast, armpit and upper arm root together rather than the upper arm alone, so I did, and I am so glad I listened to him. It is only one month so some swelling is left, but I am so excited to see how it looks in 3 months!! I will come back to write a review at the 3-month mark too!!


This is my 3-month review after stem cell thigh and knee liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho. I bruised quite a lot when I first had liposuction, so I wondered whether the bruises would ever fade.. And I had read a lot of posts saying bruises can leave pigmentation, so I was worried, but they cleared up much faster than I expected hehe From the time my sutures came out I massaged with oil morning and evening every day, and maybe because of that I never had anything I would call BioBond! I think the doctor's surgical skill played a big part in that too heh Thanks to it I am living a very happy life Of course part of it is the effort I put in after surgery! I am still on a never-ending diet..hehe Every time I look at my before photos I get a reality check, so it works well as diet motivation^^ I plan to keep taking care of myself


I definitely wanted a clinic with highly experienced doctors, and while researching I found that TheLINE's doctors have over 20 years of experience and the reviews were good, so I booked a date right after my consultation with Dr. Cho! I originally went for lower body lipo, so I had love handles, thighs and hip grafting first, then a month later arms and accessory breast. I already trusted his skill from the waist-to-saddlebags surgery, so honestly I was not worried about my arms either hehe The contour came out really smooth and the best part is the scars are barely visible! There is one small one on each armpit, and maybe because it was done with stem cells they healed fast and now they are almost invisible. Once your upper arm fat is gone you want to wear sleeveless tops, right?? I thought scars would look bad, but since they are barely visible I was wearing sleeveless freely soon after surgery hehe My upper arm fat used to make me look bigger, but now I look much smaller and slimmer!! The line falling from my shoulders got prettier too, so I find myself wearing off-shoulder tops often lol I am going to take good care of myself so it does not come back!!


I had abdomen / thigh / love handle liposuction with Dr. Yoongeun Kim at TheLINE Plastic Surgery! The reason I chose this clinic is that the scar sites were the fewest. One in the buttock crease and one on each side at the panty line, three scar sites in total, and through those they did my abdomen, love handles, and inner/outer thighs. As for the cost, I went in accepting that stem cell surgery is expensive, and the manager worked out the price for me so I had the surgery at a good price! I had consultations at two or three other places, and I think TheLINE is the only place where you can have stem cell surgery at this price. In terms of satisfaction, outer thigh, inner thigh, then abdomen, in that order haha My saddlebags never went away no matter what, but liposuction cleared them completely and my legs look much longer! Two aftercare sessions were included and I have had them, and everyone at the clinic was kind and lovely haha Next time I am going for fat grafting!


It has been 3 months since my arm lipo and arm lift~! There is no discomfort at the surgical site at all now!! First of all, thinner arms mean I do not look bulky in clothes, and more than any other area it makes my whole torso look slimmer, so I am so, so happy!! Especially now that the sagging skin under my arms that I hated is gone, I love it There are still scars, but that was something they explained during the consultation before surgery, so I had already accepted it to a degree!! I just have to keep applying ointment and take care of them Maybe because it was done with stem cells, even though the incision is fairly long it healed without a single problem, so it was easy to care for! The swelling went down quickly too, I think Losing fat elsewhere is up to me now, but thanks to the surgery my upper arms, a lifelong worry, are back to normal and I am so happy Thank you Dr. Yoongeun Kim and Dr. Yoosuk Chung!!!!


I had arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek at TheLINE Plastic Surgery. First of all, I did a lot of research, and what mattered most to me was safety. My arms had bothered me since I was 20 even when I was thin, but I was too scared to do anything until I finally made up my mind. Then I found a lot of people saying the stem cell method is safe, so I decided after a consultation, and the manager, the doctor and all the other staff were kind. Also, when I consulted the manager I asked about my abdomen while I was there for my arms, and she said it was visceral fat so liposuction would not help much and that diet control alone would be enough. Knowing they do not oversell made me trust them more. Honestly on the day of surgery I did not feel much pain, but up to day 3 it hurt enough that daily life may be hard for some people (this may vary person to person). Strangely, right after those 3 days I could go about my day, and I did bruise a fair amount, but compared to conventional liposuction it was not the kind of bruising that looks awful. The bruises faded noticeably day by day. When I contacted them wanting to get rid of the bruises they told me to apply warm compresses, so instead of buying bruise or scar cream I just warmed a towel and used it, and it worked well! I really recommend warm compresses! Also, when I said during the consultation that safety comes first, the doctor smiled and said that is what he considers most important too, and that a bone-thin arm would not be possible. He said a suitable amount of fat has to remain to avoid side effects. But now at one month, with dieting alongside it, the arms feel right for my body and I am even happier with them. It looks really natural and I regret not doing it sooner. I am tempted to have other areas done too, but I am going to try dieting on my own first! I really recommend it!!


Hello~! It has been 3 months since my arm and accessory breast liposuction and arm lift surgery at TheLINE Plastic Surgery, so I am leaving a review to share how things changed~ Two doctors split my surgery between them~ Dr. Jungjae Baek did the arm liposuction and Dr. Jaeho Cho did the arm lift. At 3 months everything feels so light! From the shoulder line to the arm line looks delicate and I am so happy^^ My upper arm fat used to feel heavy, but now it is thinner and the line is much cleaner, so I enjoy seeing the difference when I wear a fitted t-shirt haha There was slight sagging on the inner side too, so I had the lift as well, and that area is flat and tidy now. I am very satisfied. It was a 4-stage incision so I worried a lot about scarring, but the redness is fading with time, and since the scar runs along the inner arm it is not visible when my arm is down, so it does not bother me much. I am moved by how carefully the doctor planned the surgery so the scar would be hidden...^^ Because it was done with stem cells, the wounds seem to have healed faster and the scar area is not lumpy or puckered, so it is easier to care for! Now it feels natural, as if this was always my body, and since I am satisfied more than anyone, my confidence has grown and I find myself looking in the mirror more often in daily life! From here I am going to focus on scar care~^^ Before surgery I worried a lot about side effects, but now I think I made a great choice, and I have had no side effects at all, so I am very satisfied. I hope my review helps anyone planning surgery, and I am rooting for all of you to have successful surgeries~^^


I had a revision at TheLINE for a dent in my lower belly from abdominal liposuction done at another clinic during a forehead fat graft. The dent in my lower belly had stressed me out badly, so the doctor paid extra attention to it. Since a lot of fat came out and it would be a waste, he suggested grafting it because my hip area was flat, and I think that was a great choice. It gives the look of fuller hips, so if I just diet I think my figure will look lovely hahaha The hip grafting added more cost than I had expected, but I am really glad I did it~!! Friends ask me about lipo a lot and I recommend the clinic to people I know. My friends say my clothes fit differently now hahaha The surgery was done so well that there was almost no pain and nothing was difficult. Do not go to a cheap clinic and suffer from dents like I did, go to a specialist clinic so there are no more victims like me. I strongly recommend TheLINE Thank you Dr. Yoosuk Chung and Dr. Jungjae Baek


This is my 3-month review after my procedures at TheLINE Plastic Surgery. Dr. Jaeho Cho did my abdominal and arm liposuction, and Dr. Yoosuk Chung did my breast fat grafting. It has also been 3 months since I started improving my eating and lifestyle habits with the TheLINE staff. My body and mind have adjusted to the new habits and clean eating has become routine, so my health has improved a lot as well. In particular they focused on sugar metabolism, so I am building good habits. Because I improved my eating habits alongside the surgery, my body line seems to be changing clearly, separate from my weight. I am grateful to the doctors who shaped my contour and to the staff coaching my care, and I plan to keep up the aftercare for the rest of the program!


This is my review of thigh lipo and hip fat grafting! Dr. Jungjae Baek did it and I am one month in now I chose him because I heard he works in line with current trends and many people request him. He is the youngest of the doctors For a few days right after surgery there was a throbbing ache, but it was never so painful that I could not go about my day! I took the prescribed medication and drank the pumpkin juice they sell at TheLINE, and the swelling went down quickly hehe Even without any special care the bruises faded away naturally They also include two aftercare sessions, and the staff are so kind that I leave in a good mood every time..hehe Some people have hip fat grafting done twice, and having had it once I want more, so I think I will want to do it again later..hehe Of course I am very satisfied now, but maybe because I got a taste for it, I want my belly done too lol If there is an area that bothers you, I recommend having it done at TheLINE


My wedding was coming up soon and while I was hesitating I saw TheLINE's good reviews and just went for it hehe I did not know what stem cell arm liposuction meant, but during the consultation the doctor explained professionally that it helps recovery be faster with fewer side effects, so I understood it well and thought if I am doing it anyway, stem cells would be better! Dr. Jungjae Baek gave such a kind and detailed consultation, it was great On the day of surgery I said I was very scared and he reassured me hehe All the staff at the clinic are kind and lovely too! It has been a little over a month now. It hurt for about the first 3 days and now there is no pain at all The swelling is almost gone so the compression garment has become quite loose, but I think wearing it longer is better so I am still wearing it hehe Overall the thickness went down a lot and the parts that bulged out unattractively are straight now, so I am satisfied I want to keep dieting until the wedding and take pretty photos^^


When I decide on surgery I look at a lot of review photos and visit places in person, and while researching thigh liposuction and hip fat grafting I learned about stem cell liposuction and thought it would be better to have the grafting done with stem cells, so I had the surgery! They said surgery using stem cells means faster recovery and better fat survival, so I decided to go ahead, booked on the day of my consultation, and had the surgery the very next day! Before surgery I was stressed about how lumpy my thighs got as I gained weight, but at one month post-op I can see the contour has been tidied up and I love it! They say the swelling goes down further with time, so I am really looking forward to it Since I had hip fat grafting at the same time, my waist looks more defined even though nothing was done to it hehehe If you are considering liposuction, do the hip and buttock fat grafting together! Your contour will be different


I cannot believe it is almost a year already, time really flies! It has already been early last year since Dr. Yoongeun Kim at TheLINE did my stem cell waist-to-saddlebags surgery.. hehe At first it was hard to get up from sitting and I had to hold the wall, but now I am so used to my post-op body that my before photos look strange to me! From the consultation Dr. Kim listened to my concerns so well and explained my body's issues, how he would do the surgery, the stem cells and so on in such detail that I trusted him and went ahead. My choice was not wrong..lol I had abdomen, love handles, thighs and the knee (Chanel line) liposuction plus hip grafting. That is almost my whole body except the arms and a lot of fat was removed, so I expected to be woozy for a long time after surgery, but with the stem cell method the bruises really did fade faster and my condition improved faster! Only right after surgery was a bit hard, and I adapted quickly, so from one week on it was very comfortable hehe I dieted alongside the surgery so I lost weight overall, but I do not think dieting alone would have shaped my contour like this really Love handles are a really, really hard area to lose, and they are all cleaned up, and as for belly fat... I could never even face it, so without lipo I never would have had the motivation and never could have lost it... I will not even bother mentioning the buttocks lol I had hip dips and no firmness, and the grafting gave me a whole new look.. heh Honestly, before surgery I read reviews and worried the graft would not survive and there would be no difference from before, but it is holding up well so far! Stem cells are the real deal, everyone..lol Even when I slack on care, fat does not come back easily in the areas I had done! Instead it goes to the areas I did not do.... hehe I can wear pretty much anything I want now, so I pick clothes and shop without worry and I love it, and this summer I am going to try a bikini!!!


It has been one month since my stem cell lift + lipo surgery at TheLINE Plastic Surgery Dr. Jaeho Cho, who is well known for lifts, performed it! My weight has not changed from before surgery, but all the sagging skin has been tidied up, so at the same weight I look so~~ much slimmer hehe I chose the 4-stage incision so the scar length is fairly long, but it is not as unsightly as I expected It is only one month, but some of the parts that were red have turned completely skin-colored, so I think it is healing well! Scars just need time, and I think they will improve with ointment care Since the sutures came out the swelling goes down quickly, the tight lumps are gradually smoothing out, the uncomfortable feeling is getting better, and it looks smoother and smoother! I have been gradually increasing my arm range of motion, so there is no discomfort in daily movement now I tried on a dress I wore before surgery and it is completely different..... I am still in recovery so I am being careful and not going out much, but I cannot wait for spring so I can wear fitted tops hehe Nobody but my family knows I had surgery and I cannot wait to show it off!!


3 weeks after breast fat grafting No discomfort anywhere now and no bruising or swelling! There is a gap between my thighs and I can clearly feel they are thinner My breasts did not change dramatically like implants would, but the cleavage and upper part filled out, so the shape looks pretty


Hello. I am someone who was too scared to act and has only lurked for 3 years. I was overweight all through childhood, and since turning 20 my weight has bounced up and down like a rubber band. Fat that used to come off with a little effort when I was younger stopped coming off after 30.. Especially my bulging lower belly, straight-up waist, and the upper arm fat that stayed even when I was slim I finally decided enough was enough, made up my mind to have lipo, and while searching hard I found TheLINE Plastic Surgery! First of all, I am not someone who expects to become half my size from lipo. I went in thinking, please just tidy up my lower belly that will not go in, my straight waist and my bulging upper arms. Rather than taking out too much and risking side effects, take a moderate amount and just shape the contour safely. The manager who greeted me first and Dr. Jungjae Baek gave me exactly the consultation I wanted, and I paid on the spot. I am only 3 days out from abdominal and arm liposuction so there is still a lot of swelling, but my lower belly was truly amazing It really went from a bulging lower belly to flat! Even swollen, my upper arms went from being round at the sides of my shoulders to falling straight down! It is a shame the photos do not capture it.. And .. breast fat grafting!! I already knew Dr. Yoosuk Chung is well known for breast fat grafting, so thinking I might as well put the discarded fat into my chest, I asked belatedly to have the grafting too I truly would have regretted not doing it. Well, I never had breasts like this before, so I guess there would have been nothing to regret...? I really am proud of myself. Once my sutures come out in a week I am going to start exercising properly! For now I am so satisfied


This is my one-week review of breast fat grafting~ I had breast fat grafting with Dr. Yoosuk Chung at TheLINE Plastic Surgery. The fat was harvested from my thighs. My breasts were small and uneven, so the doctor took that into account and filled the upper part and cleavage, putting in 100cc and 80cc to even out the two sides. I do not have much fat on my upper body so he could not put in a huge amount, but he does not force in a large volume, he puts in the maximum suited to each individual. Until day 5 my chest felt tight when I woke up, but after about a week that feeling was gone and the bruising had faded a lot.


On 12/6 last year I had stem cell thigh liposuction and knee (Chanel) liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE Plastic Surgery, and about 40 days have passed. I have had liposuction on other areas at another clinic, and with the stem cell method there is clearly less swelling/pain and faster recovery, so now I am going about daily life without any particular discomfort. I was born with a heavy lower body and my thigh size was always a complex, but now I confidently wear skinny jeans and my quality of life went way up.


I had the stem cell waist-to-saddlebags surgery with Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE Plastic Surgery! I had love handle and thigh liposuction plus hip grafting. I had gained so much weight mainly in my lower body and thighs that the stress was no joke Right after surgery, even with the swelling, I could feel my thighs were thinner, and my thighs and love handles kept slimming down steadily up to around month 6-7. As for the hip grafting, honestly before I did it I doubted it would work in one round and thought I would do a second round if it went flat. I had read a lot of reviews saying one round is not enough... But contrary to my worries, maybe because the graft took well, at 11 months now it is holding up nicely!! When it was swollen at first it was really full and I thought I wish these were my actual buttocks hehe but that was swelling, not fat hehe and the more the swelling went down, the more my waist, hips and thighs got beautifully defined, so every time I put on pants or leggings I think I am so glad I had the surgery Honestly I have put on a little weight since it is winter, but it barely shows, and maybe because my contour is well defined the fat no longer settles in unflattering ways like before! I used to hate summer because I did not want my body seen, but now I look forward to it hehe


This is my review after stem cell abdomen and thigh liposuction + buttock fat grafting with Dr. Yoongeun Kim at TheLINE Plastic Surgery! I do not usually wear skirts so I had not noticed, but a few days ago I was putting on stockings for a skirt and was newly amazed lol With the belly fat gone, my stockings and shorts do not roll down or ride up..? I guess people who are naturally slim live without ever knowing this annoyance..? lol Before lipo I had to go to the bathroom now and then to fix my stockings and shorts that had rolled up like underwear They pressed in and left marks.. Now I can wear them comfortably without any of that, and I never knew this could make me so happy lol Some effects of lipo you only learn by doing it lol My weight is now permanently in the 40s hehe I was 54 before surgery, dropped to 52 at one month, then went back and forth between 48-49kg at 6 months. I did a bit of dieting recently and now it does not go up to 49 anymore!! It is the end of the year so I am meeting a lot of people, and every time they say I look so much prettier and that I have lost weight hehe I am happy. I love TheLINE lol


It has been 7 months since Dr. Yoongeun Kim at TheLINE Plastic Surgery did my abdomen, love handle, thigh liposuction and buttock fat grafting I had a lot of fat on my lower body and the contour was lumpy, so I never even tried leggings and could not wear tight skirts or pants After the waist-to-saddlebags surgery the side and back lines became smooth, so now I wear leggings and fitted jeans freely Even the hip dips, the part I hated most about my cursed lower body, got filled in, so my contour looks prettier in clothes From the consultation the doctor listened carefully to what I wanted improved and checked everything thoroughly, so I had high hopes for the result, and it turned out even better than I expected and is lasting well, so I am very satisfied!


I had been stressed for a long time about my nasolabial folds and philtrum lines. I regularly had fillers, contouring injections and Shurink once or twice a year, but I never got the satisfaction I wanted, so while looking into it I read facelift reviews, had a consultation with Dr. Yoosuk Chung at TheLINE and went through with the surgery~ When choosing a clinic, I first looked for one with a lot of experience and know-how in my type of facelift and one that insists on safe surgery. I went through their websites trying to find a clinic that does not focus only on marketing but has verified skill and experience. Looking for a safe, experienced and highly skilled clinic is how I found Dr. Yoosuk Chung at TheLINE Plastic Surgery. Dr. Chung, who uses stem cells and has extensive deep plane facelift experience, gave a consultation that covered only what was needed with no unnecessary upselling, which I appreciated. The best thing after the procedure was above all the immediate satisfaction. He checked my health status and precautions in fine detail before surgery, and on the day of surgery he eased my nerves and looked after me At my post-op visits the doctor personally checked whether anything was uncomfortable and examined the surgical site, which was very reassuring Usually it is hard to see the doctor in person after surgery, but here the consultation manager, the nurses and the doctor all checked on me at every visit, which I loved Also, pain varies from person to person, but after surgery you inevitably become sensitive, and the nurses were so understanding of that and kept me comfortable without unnecessary questions, which I was grateful for. The aftercare was thorough and attentive too. A month later, everyone I know says I look ten years younger, the surgical area is less noticeable than I expected and the scars are not visible, so I feel I just need to take good care of myself. I am satisfied After reaching middle age I was busy just getting by, and at some point I felt sad looking at my face. But I am so glad I can look pretty at an age when I want to look pretty^^ Most of all, I loved that there is an experienced doctor here who does not see a person's wish to look better as just money, and who sincerely checked on me many times for wound healing and fast recovery. Since it is surgery that costs a lot of money and worry, I hope you look carefully and choose a clinic with kindness, safety, skill, broad experience and thorough aftercare


I had stem cell arm and accessory breast liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE Plastic Surgery! I had no experience with liposuction so I was very nervous and worried before surgery, but the staff around me at TheLINE Plastic Surgery were so kind that I was able to relax a lot. And they carefully checked my condition right up until I went in for surgery! After surgery I was completely out of it, but I recovered warmly in the recovery room and had no pain at all! People say you cannot raise your arms, but mine went up fairly well and nothing hurt at all. My condition was so good that I could even keep an appointment after the surgery. Even when I slept that night it was only uncomfortable, never painful enough to keep me awake or make things hard, so I was satisfied


I chose TheLINE because of the fast recovery of stem cell liposuction, and the good part was hearing that they make only one scar in the armpit, which I was happy with I went to the chief director because I wanted the fat removed well without dents or side effects. It is only one month so I cannot tell yet about the bone-thin arm look, and I heard the swelling goes down a lot after 3 months so I am looking forward to it. They said swelling can last up to 6 months. Pain and bruising were mild, about the level of muscle soreness, so I went about daily life without trouble after surgery. The only thing I still cannot do well is raise both arms overhead. My armpit area is tight so I am massaging it


It has already been 4 months since my stem cell arm lift at TheLINE hehe At first after surgery there was a slight pulling and uncomfortable feeling, but now they just feel like my own arms (?) lolol Since the contour clearly changed after surgery I got more motivated, and I think I lost another 3-4kg! That is a great development hehe Most people have lipo and the lift together, but I only wanted the sagging part removed so I only had the lift From the reviews it seemed Dr. Jaeho Cho does almost all the lifts and the reviews were good, so I went to him Because of the sagging, when I lowered my arms the flesh pushed out and looked bad, but now that the loose skin around my armpit is gone that does not happen and I love it! Flesh I never want to see again lol I used to only wear oversized clothes, but these days I wear fitted ones a lot, and thanks to that my body feels a bit on alert so my motivation to diet grew too hehe Now only scar care is left, so I am going to take care of it diligently!


My arms and abdomen were what stressed me out, and I am satisfied enough that I am looking forward to summer


Posting my 7-month review after liposuction + grafting at TheLINE. Honestly from the day of surgery through day 7 it was hard especially sleeping and going to the bathroom But exactly one week later moving became incredibly easy, like magic -before surgery 66kg -1 week after surgery 65-66kg almost no weight change in this period -2 weeks after surgery 65kg the swelling started to come down a little from here and the contour started showing, no weight change -3 weeks after surgery 63kg this period is definitely the turning point -1 to 2 months after surgery 63kg until then I had no appetite and was uncomfortable so I ate whatever (I did eat all three meals). From month 1 I started taking supplements, still no diet -3 months to now 62-63kg going back and forth. The amazing thing is the difference from before surgery is only 4kg, but because the contour changed I look like I lost a ton of weight. This must be why people get lipo,,, Get lipo everyone, your contour changes, seriously And if you add grafting too


It has been a year since Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE did my arm liposuction :) My weight went up a bit over the holidays but the contour is the same, so I am satisfied. Now at the one-year mark people around me often ask if I lost weight. The heaviness of my upper body was a big worry, but that matronly heaviness is gone and I am happy. I am dieting until the end of the year, and once I slim down overall I think I will look even thinner with a better contour, so I am looking forward to it. Thank you for bringing out the best contour without overdoing it and for helping my body shape :)


This is my 3-month review after abdomen and back corset line lipo with Dr. Jungjae Baek at TL Plastic Surgery. My weight was 66-67kg right before lipo and now it is around 61kg. I did not diet well so I did not lose much They said they removed about 2.9kg of fat in total I will post before and after photos~ My waist and back line came out so my clothes fit much better. I am an E cup and my belly stuck out a lot so I only wore boxy tops, but now I confidently wear crop tops and knit dresses. I love it so, so much. I am very satisfied, and if I had the money I would want lipo on my arms and thighs too... I am going to save up and do more!! I chose TL because, unlike other places, they do stem cell liposuction so recovery is fast and there is much less pain. Recovery was fast and I did not bruise much. I think that may be thanks to the stem cells. And the staff and the doctor were kind. Dr. Jungjae Baek explained things in detail, so I booked the same day and had surgery the following week. I am so, so satisfied and happy. I feel more confident when meeting people, which is great.


At TheLINE in Sinsa-dong, Dr. Jungjae Baek did liposuction on my abdomen and inner thigh saddlebags and grafted it to my hips Great value for money. The swelling is not fully gone yet but I am so, so satisfied. My waist came in and I have hips now!! It is amazing hehe If you are hesitating, do it as soon as you can~


3 weeks after breast fat grafting No discomfort anywhere now and no bruising or swelling! There is a gap between my thighs and I can clearly feel they are thinner My breasts did not change dramatically like implants would, but the cleavage and upper part filled out, so the shape looks pretty


It has been a month since my surgery at TheLINE. I agonized over liposuction, but I agonized just as much over hip fat grafting. I had facial fat grafting elsewhere before and back then the graft did not take at all But this time it seems to have gone really well. They say the liposuction needs more time, but I already like it, and the hips really do look dramatically different before and after, I love it hehehe I plan to have a second round of fat grafting so I am even more excited. This is my review after saddlebag lipo, love handle lipo and hip grafting with Dr. Jungjae Baek at TheLINE heh Next post My review after stem cell full-body lipo


This is my 6-month review after love handle liposuction, thigh liposuction and buttock fat grafting with Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE Plastic Surgery~~! It looks natural now and the contour is nicely defined, so I am satisfied~ Even if I gain weight the contour does not really break down~ I recommend Dr. Jaeho Cho~!


My review after stem cell full-body lipo with Dr. Yoosuk Chung at TheLINE! I had abdomen, corset line, thighs, Y-zone and Chanel line lipo + hip grafting. My abdomen was done 360 degrees! Now I even forget I had surgery and live as if my body was always like this The best part after surgery is being able to wear body-hugging dresses comfortably without sucking in my stomach lolol I love tight dresses, but because of my belly fat and hip dips I always had to hold my stomach in and wear hip padding Now I wear them freely without any of that!! And I am on the shorter side so I could not wear long pieces in case they made me look stumpy, but I got slimmer overall and my contour is nicely defined, so now I wear long dresses regardless of my height lol I worried about the hip grafting because a lot of reviews said it goes away quickly and satisfaction is not that high, but maybe because it was done as a stem cell graft it is still holding up well! Dr. Chung said he specializes in grafting, and of course his skill played a big part!! The amazing thing is that I have been eating freely lately and gained a bit, but the contour is still there Still, I am going to get back to exercising and eating well to build an even prettier body!!


My arms bothered me so much that I decided to have a procedure, and a friend recommended TheLINE Plastic Surgery so I went for a consultation~ The kind manager said doing the accessory breast and arm fat together gives a better result, so that is what I did!!! The schedule matched Dr. Jungjae Baek so I had it with him, and the cost was fine to me with the mindset of if it makes me prettier, so I went ahead with the pre-procedure steps right away~ On the day I arrived nervous and half excited, and afterwards there was no pain at all since I was in the compression garment, just slightly uncomfortable, and once I took the garment off nothing hurt except raising my arms At first I could not tell what had changed.. but comparing my first photo with the one now, wow, that is it I am considering my abdomen too.. everyone should just do it lol


I had stem cell arm liposuction with Dr. Jungjae Baek at TheLINE! I chose TheLINE because there is no elbow incision, the stem cells, the doctor's experience, and because he gave such a detailed and professional consultation, and in the end it was really the right choice! Compared to other areas my fat concentrates in my upper arms, so no matter what I wore I looked heavier than my actual weight He said that for a straight arm line it would be better to treat the accessory breast, armpit and upper arm root together rather than the upper arm alone, so I did, and I am so glad I listened to him. The side bulge that bothered me the mo~~st is completely gone and the armpit fat disappeared too, so my upper body that used to look stuffy is now light and tidy, a refreshing feeling....? lol lol Whatever I wear I just look delicate and I love it


Of all my body parts, upper arm fat had been my biggest worry since childhood, and an acquaintance strongly recommended it, so I visited TheLINE thinking I would just have one consultation, and I ended up booking and paying on the spot. You have one consultation with the manager and then one with the doctor. There is definitely a reason you consult with both the manager and the doctor separately. And the manager and the coordinator were all kind The surgery really, really exceeded my expectations. I had stem cell liposuction on my arms, accessory breast, under the armpit and the upper arm root, with Dr. Jungjae Baek. When I lower my arms, the fat just below my shoulder and the accessory breast are completely gone. That area made my upper body look bulky and it stressed me out. The problem now is that I have gained a lot of weight recently after taking a break from exercise, but the before and after difference felt satisfying enough to me, and everyone I know said the difference was big and they were envious enough to want it themselves. If you carry a fair amount of fat on your upper body, I recommend not doing arms alone but also having the accessory breast and back of the arm done. I think satisfaction is much higher when done together with the accessory breast. Everyone, do not hesitate, just save up and do it!! And there is only one scar and it is not visible, so unless you say something nobody knows you had surgery.


Hello everyone!! Today already marks 2 months since my liposuction! I rushed over to write a review! First, as for my body, compared to right after the liposuction I have been eating a lot of things so my circumference went up about 0.5cm, but after about 2 days of walking and cutting my portions exactly in half it came right back. Even when the circumference goes up, the contour definitely never disappears, it just grows in that same shape. Normally if your contour is not well defined the fat just goes everywhere, but Dr. Jungjae Baek shaped the contour itself so beautifully that I am still living very satisfied. These days more and more people I know say why does your body barely change even though you eat, I am jealous hehe After two months the swelling has come down so well that the contour shows more and more hehe Also I have kept up a bit of care since the surgery, so my confidence has grown even more!! Everyone, you know that care is essential even after surgery, right?! hehe I really am living such a satisfying life again. I am preparing to go to TheLINE Plastic Surgery for a consultation on other areas later Everyone have a good night!!


Leaving my three-month lipo review! I had arm liposuction, accessory breast liposuction, abdominal liposuction and love handle liposuction with Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE. All the staff were so kind, it was great. And the doctor checked my progress so carefully and warmly... so sweet .... haha I was worried because my incision sites were healing slowly, but they've all healed and I think in about a year? you won't even be able to tell!!! He said I have a lot of muscle, but more fat came out than I expected and everyone around me noticed haha I'm working out consistently, and the more weight I lose the more the contour shows! I keep recommending it to my friends haha TheLINE, a place I tried myself and can trust! Let's all get pretty at TheLINE!! Thank you Dr. Baek for giving me back the confidence in my life T_T


I'm 8 months out from stem cell abdominal and thigh liposuction plus hip fat grafting at TheLINE Plastic Surgery Dr. Yoongeun Kim did lipo on my abdomen, love handles, thighs and Chanel line, and grafted every bit of the collected fat into my hips! My rib cage is wide and my waist is straight up and down, and on top of that I had gained a lot of belly fat, so even doing Pilates and dieting barely changed anything, which was really discouraging and depressing T_T But after taking off all the belly fat with abdominal and love handle liposuction and adding the hip grafting, my contour changed so much that I wonder if this body is really mine! Liposuction matters, but for fat grafting they say the fat survival rate is especially important and it can get reabsorbed quickly, so I really wanted to do it with stem cells. Even if it cost a bit more! Looking back, I'm so glad I went with stem cells! Even the slightly dented hip dip area hasn't gone flat and is holding up well 8 months later, and now that my hips have overall volume, you can't tell at all that my waist is straight when I'm dressed - it actually makes me look like I have a really curvy figure, so everything I wear looks good on me!!! I used to only try to cover up, but now I even deliberately pick clothes that show my hip line more haha If you have a straight waist like me, don't just take off the belly fat, definitely get hip fat grafting done together!! haha


I'm 5 months out from stem cell arm liposuction + arm lift at TheLINE! Dr. Joongjae Baek did liposuction on my arms, accessory breast tissue, under the armpit and the upper arm root, and since my upper arms sagged a lot after dieting, I had an arm lift with Dr. Jaeho Cho at the same time! I went for a consultation because they're known for body contouring and do a lot of lift surgery, and since the liposuction, fat grafting and lift all used stem cells, recovery was fast. Especially with an arm lift the scar is unavoidable, but they said that with stem cells the scar improves quickly, so after a lot of thought I trusted the doctors and went ahead. Even though I lost a ton of weight through dieting, the flab on my upper arms and armpits wouldn't go away, and as a side effect? of dieting my upper arms sagged a lot T_T My goal was to get rid of the flab and the sagging skin, and I'm more than satisfied with the result!! I didn't do any special dieting or care after surgery so I'm only -2kg, but everyone I meet tells me I've lost a lot of weight! Every time I hear that I feel like the money was worth it haha It was a 4-stage lift so the incision scar is fairly long and I did wonder if I'd made the right call, but the scar is improving faster day by day, so if I take good care of it through this winter I think it will be almost invisible by the time I wear short sleeves next year! Right now I wear long sleeves anyway so nobody knows, they just think I lost weight hehe I just need to keep up with the scar care!


It's been three months since my stem cell arm lift at TheLINE After losing a lot of weight, sagging became my new worry, and while looking around I found out there's a surgery called an arm lift, and I heard Dr. Jaeho Cho at TheLINE specializes in arm lifts, so I had a consultation and booked a date right away. It's been three whole months so there's no pain at all hehe Maybe because I only had the lift without liposuction, or maybe because of the stem cells, it didn't hurt that much even on the day of surgery! Of course this will vary from person to person. No matter how much I dieted, my upper arms stayed lumpy and saggy and it made me feel down and unmotivated, but now I'm motivated to diet again and I want to lose more and look better, so I'm working out and watching my meals even harder! I've lost a whole 6kg more than before surgery - I'm so proud of myself, can you believe it? haha The scar still looks a little red, but I know that's just the stage it's at right now, so I'm not rushing it and I'm applying ointment diligently. I won't be showing my arms for a while anyway so it doesn't bother me right now hehe And now that my arms are slimmer I don't look bulky even in a thick knit, so surprisingly my satisfaction is at its highest even in winter like now!! I did it because I want to wear tank tops in summer, but I'm glad I got it done before winter came! If your upper arms sag like mine and you're thinking about an arm lift, go do it now, everyone - it's a whole new world hehe


Last November I had abdomen/corset/thigh liposuction. I went back and forth on whether I really needed liposuction, but I decided to go for it, and after looking around all over I made up my mind to have it done by Dr. Joongjae Baek at TheLINE and just went for it..!! I looked into many places, but four things weighed heavily in my decision to choose TheLINE: 1. safety 2. reliable results 3. close location 4. fast recovery! After all, I had the surgery while working full time, so I had to save my vacation days and get straight back to work haha I liked the results I came across while researching, of course, and the fact that they use stem cells..? so you can recover safely and quickly was appealing. It's now been exactly 1 year since my surgery, so I wanted to write up how it's gone. First, I'm 10kg lighter than before surgery, and I'm maintaining it well while eating reasonably and doing nothing more than Pilates. My lower belly and thighs, which had been chronic worries, shrank noticeably, so I'm happy every time I get dressed. Everyone is surprised, asking when I lost all this weight, and I quite like the way I look in the mirror now, so mentally I'm doing well too. Early in recovery I worried about all sorts of things and got expensive massages and went through a lot mentally wondering if it was worth the money I spent, but now that the whole process is behind me I'm very satisfied and living with no regrets! There's still a scar on my lower abdomen, but it's not noticeable enough to bother me, so it's fine. I'm sure everyone is considering and researching this surgery for all kinds of reasons, and since it takes a lot of money and a fairly tough recovery period, I can't say I recommend it unconditionally!!!! But in the sense that it resolved one lifelong worry and lets me face the future with a healthier mindset, I'd like to recommend it. Happy end of the year, everyone!


No matter how much I dieted my legs wouldn't slim down, so I got tired of it, gave up, and only wore wide-leg pants or long skirts, until I learned about a surgery called thigh liposuction I looked around on YouTube, Naver blogs and cafes, and had a consultation at TheLINE Plastic Surgery, which is known for creating pretty contours, and had thigh liposuction and knee liposuction with Dr. Jaeho Cho. It's only been a month so there's still swelling, but the contour is slowly starting to show My weight went from 57-58kg before surgery down to 50kg now Seeing my leg line gradually slim down so nicely made dieting much more fun too The reason I want to recommend TheLINE is that first of all the staff are all so kind, and the doctors have incredible experience so there's nothing more to say~ They also take thorough care of you after surgery, so if you worry a lot about your thighs like me, I recommend TheLINE!!
Directions
T. +82 10 9868 02524-6F, 65 Garosu-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, Korea
- Weekdays
- AM 09:30 ~ PM 18:45
- Saturday
- AM 09:30 ~ PM 17:00
- Sunday & Holidays
- Closed




